diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool')
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/README | 10 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/CHANGES | 31 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/datatool.pdf | bin | 888470 -> 1180800 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.dtx | 12428 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.ins | 25 |
5 files changed, 38 insertions, 12456 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/README index 34e1b34558a..581ed50375f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/README @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -LaTeX Bundle : datatool v1.0 (datatool.sty, datapie.sty, dataplot.sty, databar.sty) +LaTeX Bundle : datatool v1.01 (datatool.sty, datapie.sty, dataplot.sty, databar.sty, databib.sty) -Last Modified : 23 July 2007 +Last Modified : 17 Aug 2007 Author : Nicola Talbot @@ -72,6 +72,11 @@ databar.sty: Hooks provided to annotate chart. +databib.sty: + + Provides commands to convert a BibTeX database into a datatool + database. + *The datatool bundle replaces the csvtools bundle which is now obsolete.* The datatool.sty package requires the following packages/files: @@ -80,7 +85,6 @@ xkeyval xfor fp substr -compare.tex The datapie.sty, dataplot.sty and databar.sty packages requires the tikz/pgf package. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/CHANGES index 11c7fa0086c..a898c349e78 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/CHANGES +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/CHANGES @@ -1 +1,32 @@ +v1.01 (2007/08/17) : + * Added databib package. + + * datatool.sty: + + - Fixed bug in datatool caused when certain commands occur + in database entries or when the data type is tested. + - Fixed bug in \DTLsubstituteall (caused problems when certain + - commands occurred in string) + - Added \DTLsplitstring + - Added \DTLifSubString and \DTLisSubString + - Added \DTLifStartsWith and \DTLisPrefix + - Added case insensitive string tests + - \DTLinitials and \DTLstoreinitials now work with ~ and \space + - \DTLinitials and \DTLstoreinitials now use \DTLinitialhyphen + - Added \dtlcompare (no longer using compare.tex) + - Added \DTLgetvalueforkey + - Added \DTLgetrowforkey + - Added optional argument to \DTLsort + - Fixed bug causing expansion in \DTLsort + - Fixed bug in \DTLsdforall and \DTLvarianceforall + - Removed extraneous spaces in \DTLaddall, \DTLminall, + \DTLmaxall, \DTLmeanforall, \DTLsdforall and \DTLvarianceforall + - Fixed bug in \DTLiflastrow + - Fixed bug in \DTLremovecurrentrow + + * Manual: + - added code that produces fig "Student Marks (with average scores". + - fixed typos in examples "Editing Database Rows" & "Mail Merging" + - added section on null values + v1.0 (2007/07/23) : Initial Release diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/datatool.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/datatool.pdf Binary files differindex 7a2784f1ee0..eb622488c8e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/datatool.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/doc/datatool.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index a7363848b5a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12428 +0,0 @@ -%\iffalse -% datatool.dtx generated using makedtx version 0.93b (c) Nicola Talbot -% Command line args: -% -src "datatool.sty=>datatool.sty" -% -src "datapie.sty=>datapie.sty" -% -src "dataplot.sty=>dataplot.sty" -% -src "databar.sty=>databar.sty" -% -doc "manual.tex" -% -author "Nicola Talbot" -% -codetitle "datatool.sty" -% -dir "source" -% datatool -% Created on 2007/7/23 22:53 -%\fi -%\iffalse -%<*package> -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%</package> -%\fi -% \iffalse -% Doc-Source file to use with LaTeX2e -% Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved. -% \fi -% \iffalse -%<*driver> -\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc} -\usepackage{ifthen} -\usepackage{alltt} -\usepackage[verbose=false]{datatool} -\usepackage{datapie,databar} -\usepackage{textcomp} -\usepackage{graphicx} -\usepackage{colortbl} -\usepackage[colorlinks, - bookmarks, - hyperindex=false, - pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot}, - pdftitle={datatool: Databases and data manipulation}, - pdfkeywords={LaTeX,package,database,data,chart,plot}]{hyperref} -\usetikzlibrary{snakes} - - %hyperindex conflicts with doc - %(end up with |usage|hyperpage in indexentry) - %This unfortunately means that the changes section doesn't - %have active links, but at least it will keep makeindex happy. - -\renewcommand{\usage}[1]{\textit{\hyperpage{#1}}} -\renewcommand{\main}[1]{\hyperpage{#1}} -\newcommand{\see}[2]{\emph{see} #1} -\makeatletter -\def\index@prologue{\section*{Index}} - - % commands are too wide for a 3 column index - \def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi - \columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@ - \twocolumn[\index@prologue]% - \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces} - \def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} -\makeatother -\RecordChanges -\PageIndex -\CheckSum{8992} -\CodelineNumbered - -\newcommand*{\sty}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\env}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\definecolor{defbackground}{rgb}{0.8,1,1} - -\makeatletter -\newcommand*{\setting}[2]{\textsf{#2}\relax -\@for\thiscmd:=#1\do{% -\edef\doindex{\noexpand\index -{\thiscmd\space settings=\noexpand\cs{\thiscmd} settings>#2=\noexpand -\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}}\doindex -}} -\makeatother - -\newcommand*{\counterfmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index -{#1 counter=\texttt{#1} counter|hyperpage}} - -\newcommand*{\ics}[1]{\cs{#1}\SpecialMainIndex{#1}} - -\newsavebox\defsbox -\newenvironment{definition}{% -\begin{lrbox}{\defsbox}% -\begin{minipage}{\linewidth} -}{% -\end{minipage} -\end{lrbox}% -\vskip10pt -\noindent -{\setlength{\fboxsep}{4pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{1.25pt}% -\fcolorbox{black}{defbackground}{\usebox\defsbox}% -}\vskip10pt -} - -\newcommand*{\pkgopt}[2][datatool]{\textsf{#2}\index -{#1 package options=\textsf{#1} package options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}} - -\newcounter{example} -\newcommand*{\examplename}{example} -\makeatletter -\newenvironment{example}[2]{\refstepcounter{example}\label{#2}% -\par\vskip10pt\noindent -\textbf{\large Example \theexample\ (#1)}% -\addcontentsline{loe}{section}{\protect\numberline{\theexample}#1}% -\nopagebreak\par\vskip10pt\nopagebreak -}% -{\begin{center}\rule{2in}{1pt}\end{center}} - -\newcommand*{\listofexamples}{\section*{List of Examples}% -\@starttoc{loe}} -\makeatother - - -\begin{document} -\DocInput{datatool.dtx} -\end{document} -%</driver> -%\fi -%\MakeShortVerb{"} -%\DeleteShortVerb{\|} -% -% \title{datatool v 1.0: Databases and data manipulation} -% \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt] -%School of Computing Sciences\\ -%University of East Anglia\\ -%Norwich. Norfolk\\ -%NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom.\\ -%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}} -% -% \date{23rd July 2007} -% \maketitle -%\tableofcontents -%\listofexamples -% -% \section{Introduction} -% -% \changes{1.0}{2007 July 22}{Initial version} -%The \sty{datatool} bundle consists of the following -%packages: \sty{datatool}, \sty{datapie}, \sty{dataplot} and -%\sty{databar}. -% -%The \sty{datatool} package can be used to: -%\begin{itemize} -%\item Create or load databases. -%\item Sort rows of a database (either numerically or alphabetically, -%ascending or descending.) -%\item Perform repetitive operations on each row of a database -%(e.g.\ mail merging.) Conditions may be imposed to exclude rows. -%\item Determine where an argument is an integer, a real number, -%currency or a string. (Scientific notation is currently not -%supported.) Locale dependent number settings are supported (such -%as a comma as a decimal character and a full stop as a number -%group character.) -%\item Convert locale dependent numbers/currency to the decimal -%format required by the \sty{fp} package, enabling fixed point -%arithmetic to be performed on elements of the database. -%\item Names can be converted to initials. -%\item Strings can be tested to determine if they are all -%upper or lower case. -%\end{itemize} -% -%The \sty{datapie} package can be used to convert a database into -%a pie chart: -%\begin{itemize} -%\item Segments can be separated from the rest of the chart to make -%them stand out. -%\item Colour/grey scale options. -%\item Predefined segment colours can be changed. -%\item Hooks provided to add extra information to the chart -%\end{itemize} -% -%The \sty{databar} package can be used to convert a database into -%a bar chart: -%\begin{itemize} -%\item Colour/grey scale options. -%\item Predefined bar colours can be changed. -%\item Hooks provided to add extra information to the chart -%\end{itemize} -% -%(The \sty{datapie} and \sty{databar} packages do not support the -%creation of 3D charts, and I have no plans to implement them at any -%later date. The use of 3D charts should be discouraged. They may look -%pretty, but the purpose of a chart is to be informative. Three -%dimensional graphics cause distortion, which can result in misleading -%impressions.) -% -%The \sty{dataplot} package can be used to convert a database into -%a two dimensional plot using markers and/or lines. Three dimensional -%plots are currently not supported. -% -%\textbf{This package replaces the \sty{csvtools} package which is now -%obsolete.} -% -%\section{Data Types} -%\label{sec:datatypes} -% -%The \sty{datatool} package recognises four data types: integers, -%real numbers, currency and strings. -% -%\begin{description} -%\item[Integers] An integer is a sequence of digits, optionally -%groups of three digits may be separated by the number group character. -%The default number group character is a comma (,) but may be -%changed using \cs{DTLsetnumberchars} (see below.) -% -%\item[Real Numbers] A real number is an integer followed by the -%decimal character followed by one or more digits. The decimal -%character is a full stop (.) by default. The number group -%and decimal characters may be changed using -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetnumberchars} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsetnumberchars}\marg{number group character}\marg{decimal character} -%\end{definition} -%Note that scientific notation is not supported, and the number group -%character may not be used after the decimal character. -% -%\item[Currency] A currency symbol followed by an integer or -%real number is considered to be the currency data type. -%There are two predefined currency symbols, "\$" and \cs{pounds}. -%In addition, if any of the following commands are defined at the -%start of the document, they are also considered to be a currency -%symbol: \cs{texteuro}, \cs{textdollar}, \cs{textstirling}, -%\cs{textyen}, \cs{textwon}, \cs{textcurrency}, \cs{euro} -%and \cs{yen}. Additional currency symbols can be defined using -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLnewcurrencysymbol}\marg{symbol} -%\end{definition} -% -%\item[Strings] Anything that doesn't belong to the above three -%types is considered to be a string. -% -%\end{description} -% -%\subsection{Conditionals} -%\label{sec:ifconditions} -% -%The following conditionals are provided by the \sty{datatool} -%package: -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifint} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifint}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{text} is an integer then do \meta{true part}, otherwise -%do \meta{false part}. For example -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifint{2536}{integer}{not an integer} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifint{2536}{integer}{not an integer}. -% -%The number group character may appear in the number, for example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifint{2,536}{integer}{not an integer} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifint{2,536}{integer}{not an integer}. -%However, the number group character may only be followed by a group -%of three digits. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifint{2,5,3,6}{integer}{not an integer} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifint{2,5,3,6}{integer}{not an integer}. -%The number group character may be changed. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}% -%\DTLifint{2,536}{integer}{not an integer} -%\end{verbatim} -%this now produces: -%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}\relax -%\DTLifint{2,536}{integer}{not an integer}, since 2,536 is now -%a real number. -% -%Note that nothing else can be appended or prepended to the -%number. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}% -%\DTLifint{2,536m}{integer}{not an integer} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}\relax -%\DTLifint{2,536m}{integer}{not an integer}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifreal} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifreal}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{text} is a real number then do \meta{true part}, otherwise -%do \meta{false part}. For example -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifreal{1000.0}{real}{not real} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifreal{1000.0}{real}{not real}. -% -%Note that an integer is not a real number: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifreal{1,000}{real}{not real} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifreal{1,000}{real}{not real}. -% -%Whereas -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifreal{1,000.0}{real}{not real} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifreal{1,000.0}{real}{not real}. -% -%However -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}% -%\DTLifreal{1,000}{real}{not real} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}\relax -%\DTLifreal{1,000}{real}{not real} since the comma is now -%the decimal character. -% -%Currency is not considered to be real: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}% -%\DTLifreal{\$1.00}{real}{not real} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}\relax -%\DTLifreal{\$1.00}{real}{not real}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifcurrency} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifcurrency}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{text} is currency, then do \meta{true part}, otherwise -%do false part. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifcurrency{\$5.99}{currency}{not currency} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifcurrency{\$5.99}{currency}{not currency}. Similarly: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifcurrency{\pounds5.99}{currency}{not currency} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifcurrency{\pounds5.99}{currency}{not currency}. -%Note, however, that -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifcurrency{US\$5.99}{currency}{not currency} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifcurrency{US\$5.99}{currency}{not currency}. If you want -%this to be considered currency, you will have to add the -%sequence "US\$" to the set of currency symbols: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{US\$}% -%\DTLifcurrency{US\$5.99}{currency}{not currency} -%\end{verbatim} -%this now produces: -%\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{US\$}\relax -%\DTLifcurrency{US\$5.99}{currency}{not currency}. -% -%This document has used the \sty{textcomp} package which defines -%\cs{texteuro}, so this is also considered to be currency. For -%example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifcurrency{\texteuro5.99}{currency}{not currency} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifcurrency{\texteuro5.99}{currency}{not currency}. -% -%The preferred method is to display the euro symbol in a sans-serif -%font, but -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifcurrency{\textsf{\texteuro}5.99}{currency}{not currency} -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLifcurrency{\textsf{\texteuro}5.99}{currency}{not currency}. -% -%It is better to define a new command, for example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DeclareRobustCommand*{\euro}{\textsf{\texteuro}} -%\end{verbatim} -%and add that command to the list of currency symbols. In fact, -%in this case, if you define the command \cs{euro} in the -%preamble, it will automatically be added to the list of known -%currency symbols. If however you define \cs{euro} in the document, -%you will have to add it using \ics{DTLnewcurrencysymbol}. For -%example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\newcommand*{\euro}{\textsf{\texteuro}}% -%\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\euro}% -%\DTLifcurrency{\euro5.99}{currency}{not currency} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DeclareRobustCommand*{\euro}{\textsf{\texteuro}}\relax -%\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\euro}\relax -%\DTLifcurrency{\euro5.99}{currency}{not currency}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifcurrencyunit} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifcurrencyunit}\marg{text}\marg{symbol}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{text} is currency, and uses \meta{symbol} as the unit of -%currency, then do \meta{true part} otherwise do \meta{false part}. -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifcurrencyunit{\$6.99}{\$}{dollars}{not dollars} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifcurrencyunit{\$6.99}{\$}{dollars}{not dollars}. -%Another example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\def\cost{\euro10.50}% -%\DTLifcurrencyunit{\cost}{\euro}{euros}{not euros} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\def\cost{\euro10.50}\relax -%\DTLifcurrencyunit{\cost}{\euro}{euros}{not euros}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumerical} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumerical}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{text} is numerical (either an integer, real number or -%currency) then do \meta{true part} otherwise do -%\meta{false part}. -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifnumerical{1,000.0}{number}{string}. -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: \DTLifnumerical{1,000.0}{number}{string}. -%Whereas -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}% -%\DTLifnumerical{1,000.0}{number}{string}. -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLsetnumberchars{.}{,}\relax -%\DTLifnumerical{1,000.0}{number}{string}. -%Since the number group character is now a full stop, and the -%decimal character is now a comma. (The number group character -%may only appear before the decimal character, not after it.) -% -%Currency is also considered to be numerical: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}% -%\DTLifnumerical{\$1,000.0}{number}{string}. -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLsetnumberchars{,}{.}\relax -%\DTLifnumerical{\$1,000.0}{number}{string}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstring} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstring}\marg{text}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%This is the opposite of \cs{DTLifnumerical}. If \meta{text} is -%not numerical, do \meta{true part}, otherwise do \meta{false part}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifcasedatatype} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifcasedatatype}\marg{text}\marg{string case}\marg{int case}\marg{real case}\marg{currency case} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{text} is a string do \meta{string case}, if \meta{text} -%is an integer do \meta{int case}, if \meta{text} is a real number -%do \meta{real case}, if \meta{text} is currency do -%\meta{currency case}. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifcasedatatype{1,000}{string}{integer}{real}{currency} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifcasedatatype{1,000}{string}{integer}{real}{currency}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumlt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumlt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{num1} is less than \meta{num2}, then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that both \meta{num1} and -%\meta{num2} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or -%currency.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringlt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringlt}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{string1} is alphabetically less than \meta{string2}, then do -%\meta{true part}, otherwise do \meta{false part}. -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifstringlt{aardvark}{zebra}{less}{not less} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifstringlt{aardvark}{zebra}{less}{not less}. -% -%Note that both \meta{string1} and \meta{string2} are considered to be -%strings, so for example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifstringlt{2}{10}{less}{not less} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifstringlt{2}{10}{less}{not less}, since the string "2" -%comes after the string "10" when arranged alphabetically. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiflt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLiflt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are both numerical, then this -%is equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumlt}, otherwise it is equivalent -%to \cs{DTLstringlt}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumgt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumgt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{num1} is greater than \meta{num2}, then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that both \meta{num1} and -%\meta{num2} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or -%currency.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringgt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringgt}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{string1} is alphabetically greater than \meta{string2}, then -%do \meta{true part}, otherwise do \meta{false part}. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifstringgt{aardvark}{zebra}{greater}{not greater} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifstringgt{aardvark}{zebra}{greater}{not greater}. -% -%Note that both \meta{string1} and \meta{string2} are considered to be -%strings, so for example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifstringgt{2}{10}{greater}{not greater} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifstringgt{2}{10}{greater}{not greater}, since the string "2" -%comes after the string "10" when arranged alphabetically. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifgt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifgt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are both numerical, then this -%is equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumgt}, otherwise it is equivalent -%to \cs{DTLstringgt}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumeq} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumeq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{num1} is equal to \meta{num2}, then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that both \meta{num1} and -%\meta{num2} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or -%currency.) The currency symbol is ignored when determining -%equality. For example -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifnumeq{\pounds10.50}{10.5}{true}{false} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifnumeq{\pounds10.50}{10.5}{true}{false}, since they are -%considered to be numerically equivalent. Likewise: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifnumeq{\pounds10.50}{\$10.50}{true}{false} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifnumeq{\pounds10.50}{\$10.50}{true}{false}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringeq} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringeq}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{string1} and \meta{string2} are identical, then do -%\meta{true part}, otherwise do \meta{false part}. Again, both -%\meta{string1} and \meta{string2} are considered to be strings, -%so for example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifstringeq{10.50}{10.5}{true}{false} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifstringeq{10.50}{10.5}{true}{false}. -% -%Note that the comparison is case sensitive, so for example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifstringeq{Text}{text}{true}{false} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifstringeq{Text}{text}{true}{false}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifeq} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifeq}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If both \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are numerical, then this is -%equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumeq}, otherwise it is equivalent to -%\cs{DTLifstringeq}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumclosedbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{min} $\leq$ \meta{num} $\leq$ \meta{max} then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that \meta{num}, \meta{min} and -%\meta{max} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or -%currency.) The currency symbol is ignored when determining -%equality. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5.4}{5}{7}{inside}{outside} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5.4}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}. -%Note that the closed range includes end points: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5}{5}{7}{inside}{outside} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringclosedbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}\marg{string}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%This determines if \meta{string} is between \meta{min} and -%\meta{max} in the alphabetical sense, or is equal to either -%\meta{min} or \meta{max}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifclosedbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifclosedbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{arg}, \meta{min} and \meta{max} are numerical, then this is -%equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween}, otherwise it is equivalent to -%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifnumopenbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{min} $<$ \meta{num} $<$ \meta{max} then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part}. Note that \meta{num}, \meta{min} and -%\meta{max} must be numerical (either integers, real numbers or -%currency.) Again, the currency symbol is ignored when determining -%equality. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5.4}{5}{7}{inside}{outside} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5.4}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}. -%Note that end points are not included. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5}{5}{7}{inside}{outside} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifnumclosedbetween{5}{5}{7}{inside}{outside}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifstringclosedbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}\marg{string}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%This determines if \meta{string} is between \meta{min} and -%\meta{max} in the alphabetical sense, or is equal to either -%\meta{min} or \meta{max}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifclosedbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifclosedbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{arg}, \meta{min} and \meta{max} are numerical, then this is -%equivalent to \cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween}, otherwise it is equivalent to -%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifFPclosedbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifFPclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{min} $\leq$ \meta{num} $\leq$ \meta{max} then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part} where \meta{num}, \meta{min} -%and \meta{max} are all in standard fixed point notation (i.e.\ -%no number group separator, no currency symbols and a full stop as -%a decimal point.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifFPopenbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifFPopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If \meta{min} $<$ \meta{num} $<$ \meta{max} then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part} where \meta{num}, \meta{min} -%and \meta{max} are all in standard fixed point notation (i.e.\ -%no number group separator, no currency symbols and a full stop as -%a decimal point.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifAllUpperCase} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifAllUpperCase}\marg{string}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%Tests if \meta{string} is all upper case. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifAllUpperCase{WORD}{all upper}{not all upper} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifAllUpperCase{WORD}{all upper}{not all upper}, -%whereas -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifAllUpperCase{Word}{all upper}{not all upper} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifAllUpperCase{Word}{all upper}{not all upper}. -%Note also that: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifAllUpperCase{\MakeUppercase{word}}{all upper}{not all upper} -%\end{verbatim} -%also produces: -%\DTLifAllUpperCase{\MakeUppercase{word}}{all upper}{not all upper}. -%\cs{MakeTextUppercase} (defined in David Carlisle's \sty{textcase} -%package) and \cs{uppercase} are also detected, otherwise, if -%a command is encountered, the case of the command is considered. -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifAllUpperCase{MAN{\OE}UVRE}{all upper}{not all upper} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifAllUpperCase{MAN{\OE}UVRE}{all upper}{not all upper}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifAllLowerCase} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifAllLowerCase}\marg{string}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%Tests if \meta{string} is all lower case. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifAllLowerCase{word}{all lower}{not all lower} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifAllLowerCase{word}{all lower}{not all lower}, -%whereas -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifAllLowerCase{Word}{all lower}{not all lower} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifAllLowerCase{Word}{all lower}{not all lower}. -%Note also that: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifAllLowerCase{\MakeLowercase{WORD}}{all lower}{not all lower} -%\end{verbatim} -%also produces: -%\DTLifAllLowerCase{\MakeLowercase{WORD}}{all lower}{not all lower}. -%\cs{MakeTextLowercase} (defined in David Carlisle's \sty{textcase} -%package) and \cs{lowercase} are also detected, otherwise, if -%a command is encountered, the case of the command is considered. -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifAllLowerCase{man{\oe}uvre}{all lower}{not all lower} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLifAllLowerCase{man{\oe}uvre}{all lower}{not all lower}. -% -%\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\sty{ifthen}}{ifthen} conditionals} -%\label{sec:ifthen} -% -%The commands described in the previous section can not be -%used as the conditional part of the \cs{ifthenelse} or -%\cs{whiledo} commands provided by the \sty{ifthen} package. -%This section describes analogous commands which may only be -%used in the conditional argument of \cs{ifthenelse} and -%\cs{whiledo}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisstring} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisstring}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%Tests if \meta{text} is a string. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisstring{some text}}{string}{not a string} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisstring{some text}}{string}{not a string}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisnumerical} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisnumerical}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%Tests if \meta{text} is numerical (i.e.\ not a string.) For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\$10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\$10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical}. -% -%Note however that \cs{DTLisnumerical} requires more care than -%\cs{DTLifnumerical} when used with some of the other currency -%symbols. Consider: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifnumerical{\pounds10.95}{numerical}{not numerical} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces: -%\DTLifnumerical{\pounds10.95}{numerical}{not numerical}. -%However -%\begin{verbatim} -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\pounds10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\pounds10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical}. -%This is due to the expansion that occurs within \cs{ifthenelse}. -%This can be prevented using \cs{noexpand}, for example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\noexpand\pounds10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\noexpand\pounds10.95}}{numerical}{not numerical}. -% -%Likewise: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\def\cost{\pounds10.95}% -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\noexpand\cost}}{numerical}{not numerical} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces -%\def\cost{\pounds10.95}\relax -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisnumerical{\noexpand\cost}}{numerical}{not numerical}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiscurrency} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLiscurrency}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%Tests if \meta{text} is currency. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrency{\$10.95}}{currency}{not currency} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrency{\$10.95}}{currency}{not currency}. -% -%The same warning given above for \cs{DTLisnumerical} also applies -%here. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiscurrencyunit} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLiscurrencyunit}\marg{text}\marg{symbol} -%\end{definition} -%Tests if \meta{text} is currency, and uses \meta{symbol} as the unit -%of currency. -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrencyunit{\$6.99}{\$}}{dollars}{not dollars} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrencyunit{\$6.99}{\$}}{dollars}{not dollars} -%Another example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\def\cost{\euro10.50}% -%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrencyunit{\noexpand\cost}{\noexpand\euro}}% -%{euros}{not euros} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\def\cost{\euro10.50}\relax -%\ifthenelse{\DTLiscurrencyunit{\noexpand\cost}{\noexpand\euro}}% -%{euros}{not euros}. Again note the use of \cs{noexpand}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisreal} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisreal}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%Tests if \meta{text} is a fixed point number (again, an integer is -%not considered to be a fixed point number.) For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisreal{1.5}}{real}{not real} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisreal{1.5}}{real}{not real}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisint} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisint}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%Tests if \meta{text} is an integer. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisint{153}}{integer}{not an integer} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\ifthenelse{\DTLisint{153}}{integer}{not an integer}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLislt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLislt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{arg1} is less than \meta{arg2}. As with -%\cs{DTLiflt}, if \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are numerical, -%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical -%comparison is used. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisgt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisgt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{arg1} is greater than \meta{arg2}. As with -%\cs{DTLifgt}, if \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are numerical, -%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical -%comparison is used. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiseq} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLiseq}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{arg1} is equal to \meta{arg2}. As with -%\cs{DTLifeq}, if \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are numerical, -%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical -%comparison is used. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisclosedbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisclosedbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{arg} lies between \meta{min} and -%\meta{max} (end points included.) As with -%\cs{DTLifclosedbetween}, if the arguments are numerical, -%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical -%comparison is used. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisopenbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisopenbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{arg} lies between \meta{min} and -%\meta{max} (end points excluded.) As with -%\cs{DTLifopenbetween}, if the arguments are numerical, -%a numerical comparison is used, otherwise an alphabetical -%comparison is used. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPlt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisFPlt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{num1} is less than \meta{num2}, where both -%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group -%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPlteq} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisFPlteq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{num1} is less than or equal to \meta{num2}, where both -%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group -%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPgt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisFPgt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{num1} is greater than \meta{num2}, where both -%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group -%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPgteq} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisFPgteq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{num1} is greater than or equal to \meta{num2}, where both -%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group -%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPeq} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisFPeq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{num1} is equal to \meta{num2}, where both -%numbers are in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group -%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPclosedbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisFPclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{num} lies between \meta{min} and -%\meta{max} (end points included.) All arguments must be -%numbers in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group -%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLisFPopenbetween} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLisFPopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max} -%\end{definition} -%This checks if \meta{num} lies between \meta{min} and -%\meta{max} (end points excluded.) All arguments must be -%numbers in standard fixed point format (i.e.\ no number group -%separators, no currency and a full stop as a decimal point.) -% -%\section{Fixed Point Arithmetic} -%\label{sec:fp} -% -%The \sty{datatool} package uses the \sty{fp} package to perform -%fixed point arithmetic, however all numbers must be converted -%from the locale dependent format into the format required by the -%\sty{fp} package. A numerical value (i.e.\ an integer, a real -%or currency) can be converted into a plain decimal number using -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLconverttodecimal} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLconverttodecimal}\marg{num}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%The decimal number will be stored in \meta{cmd} which must be -%a control sequence. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLconverttodecimal{1,563.54}{\mynum} -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLconverttodecimal{1,563.54}{\mynum}\relax -%will define \cs{mynum} to be \texttt{\mynum}. The command -%can then be used in any of the arithmetic macros provided by the -%\sty{fp} package. There are two commands provided to perform -%the reverse: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdecimaltolocale} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdecimaltolocale}\marg{number}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This converts a plain decimal number \meta{number} (that uses a full -%stop as the decimal character and has no number group characters) -%into a locale dependent format. The resulting number is stored -%in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLdecimaltolocale{6795.3}{\mynum} -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLdecimaltolocale{6795.3}{\mynum} -%will define \cs{mynum} to be \texttt{\mynum}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdecimaltocurrency} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency}\marg{number}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This will convert a plain decimal number \meta{number} into a -%locale dependent currency format. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price. -% -%The currency symbol used by \cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency} is -%initially "\$", but will use the currency last encountered. -%So, for example -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifcurrency{\texteuro45.00}{}{}% -%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLifcurrency{\texteuro45.00}{}{}\relax -%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price. This is because -%the last currency symbol to be encountered was \cs{texteuro}. -%You can reset the currency symbol using the command: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetdefaultcurrency} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsetdefaultcurrency}\marg{symbol} -%\end{definition} -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsetdefaultcurrency{\textyen}% -%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLsetdefaultcurrency{\textyen}\relax -%\DTLdecimaltocurrency{267.5}{\price}\price -% -%The \sty{datatool} package provides convenience commands which -%use \cs{DTLconverttodecimal}, and then use the basic macros provided -%by the \sty{fp} package. The resulting value is then converted -%back into the locale format using -%\cs{DTLdecimaltolocale} or \cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLadd} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLadd}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgadd} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgadd}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to \meta{num1}+\meta{num2}. -%\cs{DLTadd} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgadd} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. -% -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLadd{\result}{3,562.65}{412.2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLadd{\result}{3,562.65}{412.2}\result. Since -%\cs{DTLconverttodecimal} can also convert currency, you can -%also add prices. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLadd{\result}{\pounds3,562.65}{\pounds452.2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLadd{\result}{\pounds3,562.65}{\pounds452.2}\result. -% -%Note that \sty{datatool} isn't aware of exchange rates! If you -%use different currency symbols, the last symbol will be used. -%For example -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLadd{\result}{\pounds3,562.65}{\euro452.2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLadd{\result}{\pounds3,562.65}{\euro452.2}\result. -% -%Likewise, if one value is a number and the other is a currency, -%the type of the last value, \meta{num2}, will be used for the -%result. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLadd{\result}{3,562.65}{\$452.2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLadd{\result}{3,562.65}{\$452.2}\result. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLaddall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLaddall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgaddall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgaddall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the sum of all -%the numbers in \meta{number list}. -%\cs{DLTaddall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgaddall} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLaddall{\total}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\total -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLaddall{\total}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\total. -%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain -%a comma, you must group the number. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLaddall{\total}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\total -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLaddall{\total}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\total. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsub} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsub}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgsub} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgsub}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to -%\meta{num1}$-$\meta{num2}. -%\cs{DLTsub} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgsub} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. -% -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsub{\result}{3,562.65}{412.2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLsub{\result}{3,562.65}{412.2}\result. As with \cs{DTLadd}, -%\meta{num1} and \meta{num2} may be currency. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmul} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmul}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmul} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgmul}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to -%\meta{num1}$\times$\meta{num2}. -%\cs{DLTmul} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmul} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. -% -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmul{\result}{568.95}{2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLmul{\result}{568.95}{2}\result. Again, \meta{num1} or -%\meta{num2} may be currency, but unlike \cs{DTLadd} and \cs{DTLsub}, -%currency overrides integer/real. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmul{\result}{\pounds568.95}{2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLmul{\result}{\pounds568.95}{2}\result. Likewise, -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmul{\result}{2}{\pounds568.95}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLmul{\result}{2}{\pounds568.95}\result. Although it doesn't make -%sense to multiply two currencies, \sty{datatool} will allow -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmul{\result}{\$2}{\pounds568.95}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%which will produce: -%\DTLmul{\result}{\$2}{\pounds568.95}\result. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdiv} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdiv}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgdiv} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgdiv}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to -%\meta{num1}$\div$\meta{num2}. -%\cs{DLTdiv} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgdiv} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. -% -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLdiv{\result}{501}{2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLdiv{\result}{501}{2}\result. Again, \meta{num1} or \meta{num2} -%may be currency, but the resulting type will be not be a currency -%if both \meta{num1} and \meta{num2} use the same currency symbol. -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLdiv{\result}{\$501}{\$2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLdiv{\result}{\$501}{\$2}\result. Whereas -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLdiv{\result}{\$501}{2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%will produce: -%\DTLdiv{\result}{\$501}{2}\result. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLabs} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLabs}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgabs} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgabs}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -%This sets \meta{cmd} to the absolute value of \meta{num}. -%\cs{DLTabs} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgabs} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLabs{\result}{-\pounds2.50}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLabs{\result}{-\pounds2.50}\result. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLneg} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLneg}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgneg} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgneg}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -%This sets \meta{cmd} to the negative of \meta{num}. -%\cs{DLTneg} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgneg} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLneg{\result}{\pounds2.50}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLneg{\result}{\pounds2.50}\result. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsqrt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsqrt}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgsqrt} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgsqrt}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -%This sets \meta{cmd} to the sqrt root of \meta{num}. -%\cs{DLTsqrt} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgsqrt} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsqrt{\result}{2}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLsqrt{\result}{2}\result. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmin} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmin}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmin} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgmin}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the minimum of -%\meta{num1} and \meta{num2}. -%\cs{DLTmin} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmin} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmin{\result}{256}{32}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLmin{\result}{256}{32}\result. -%Again, \meta{num1} and \meta{num2} may -%be currency. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmin{\result}{256}{\pounds32}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLmin{\result}{256}{\pounds32}\result, whereas -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmin{\result}{\pounds256}{32}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLmin{\result}{\pounds256}{32}\result. As mentioned above, -%\sty{datatool} doesn't know about exchange rates, so be careful -%about mixing currencies. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmin{\result}{\pounds5}{\$6}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLmin{\result}{\pounds5}{\$6}\result, which may not necessarily -%be true! -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLminall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLminall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgminall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgminall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the minimum of all -%the numbers in \meta{number list}. -%\cs{DLTminall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgminall} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLminall{\theMin}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMin -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLminall{\theMin}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMin. -%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain -%a comma, you must group the number. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLminall{\theMin}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMin -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLminall{\theMin}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMin. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmax} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmax}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmax} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgmax}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the maximum of -%\meta{num1} and \meta{num2}. -%\cs{DLTmax} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmax} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmax{\result}{256}{32}\result -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLmax{\result}{256}{32}\result. -%Again, \meta{num1} and \meta{num2} may -%be currency, but the same warnings for \cs{DTLmin} apply. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmaxall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmaxall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmaxall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgmaxall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the maximum of all -%the numbers in \meta{number list}. -%\cs{DLTmaxall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmaxall} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmaxall{\theMax}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMax -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLmaxall{\theMax}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMax. -%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain -%a comma, you must group the number. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmaxall{\theMax}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMax -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLmaxall{\theMax}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMax. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmeanforall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmeanforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgmeanall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgmeanforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the arithmetic mean of all -%the numbers in \meta{number list}. -%\cs{DLTmeanforall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgmeanforall} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMean -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theMean. -%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain -%a comma, you must group the number. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMean -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theMean. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLvarianceforall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLvarianceforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgvarianceforall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgvarianceforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the variance of all -%the numbers in \meta{number list}. -%\cs{DLTvarianceforall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgvarianceforall} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLvarianceforall{\theVar}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theVar -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLvarianceforall{\theVar}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theVar. -%Again note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} -%contain a comma, you must group the number. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsdforall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsdforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgsdforall} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgsdforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{number list} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the control sequence \meta{cmd} to the standard deviation of all -%the numbers in \meta{number list}. -%\cs{DLTsdforall} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgsdforall} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsdforall{\theSD}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theSD -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLsdforall{\theSD}{25.1,45.2,35.6}\theSD. -%Note that if any of the numbers in \meta{number list} contain -%a comma, you must group the number. Example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsdforall{\theSD}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theSD -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLsdforall{\theSD}{{1,525},{2,340},500}\theSD. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLround} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLround}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLground} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLground}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits} -%\end{definition} -%This sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} rounded to \meta{num digits} -%after the decimal character. -%\cs{DLTround} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLground} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLtrunc} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLtrunc}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgtrunc} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgtrunc}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits} -%\end{definition} -%This sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} truncated to \meta{num digits} -%after the decimal character. -%\cs{DLTtrunc} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgtrunc} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLclip} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLclip}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLgclip} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgclip}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -%This sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} with all unnecessary 0's -%removed. -%\cs{DLTclip} sets \meta{cmd} locally, while \cs{DTLgclip} sets -%\meta{cmd} globally. -% -%\section{Strings} -% -%Strings are considered to be anything non-numerical. The -%\sty{datatool} package loads the \sty{substr} package, so -%you can use the commands defined in that package to determine -%if one string is contained in another string. In addition, -%the \sty{datatool} provides the following macros: -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLinitials} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLinitials}\marg{string} -%\end{definition} -%This converts \meta{string} (typically a name) into initials. -%For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLinitials{Mary Ann} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLinitials{Mary Ann}. Note that -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLinitials{Mary-Ann} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces: -%\DTLinitials{Mary-Ann}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLstoreinitials} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLstoreinitials}\marg{string}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This converts \meta{string} into initials and stores the -%result in \meta{cmd}. -% -%The above commands rely on the following to format the -%initials: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLafterinitials} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLafterinitials} -%\end{definition} -%This indicates what to do at the end of the initials. This -%simply does a full stop by default. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbetweeninitials} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbetweeninitials} -%\end{definition} -%This indicates what to do between initials. This does a -%full stop followed by a space by default. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen} -%\end{definition} -%This indicates what to do between an initial and a hyphen. -%This simply does a full stop by default. -% -%\section{Databases} -%\label{sec:databases} -% -%The \sty{datatool} package provides a means of creating and -%loading databases. Once a database has been created (or loaded), -%it is possible to iterate through each row of data, to make it -%easier to perform repetitive actions, such as mail merging. -% -%\subsection{Creating a New Database} -%\label{sec:newdb} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnewdb} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLnewdb}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -%This command creates a new empty database called \meta{db name}. You -%can test if a database is empty using: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifdbempty} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifdbempty}\marg{db name}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If the database called \meta{db name} is empty, do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLrowcount} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLrowcount}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -%This command displays the number of rows in the database called -%\meta{db name}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnewrow} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLnewrow}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -%This command starts a new row in the database called \meta{db name}. -%This new row becomes the current row when adding new entries. -% -%For example, the following creates an empty database called -%\texttt{mydata}: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{mydata} -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{mydata}\relax -%The following tests if the database is empty: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifdbempty{mydata}{empty}{not empty}! -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces: -%\DTLifdbempty{mydata}{empty}{not empty}! -% -%The following adds an empty row to the database, this is the -%first row of the database: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLnewrow{mydata} -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewrow{mydata}\relax -%Note that even though the only row in the database is currently -%empty, the database is no longer considered to be empty: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLifdbempty{mydata}{empty}{not empty}! -%\end{verbatim} -%This now produces: -%\DTLifdbempty{mydata}{empty}{not empty}! The row count is -%given by -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLrowcount{mydata} -%\end{verbatim} -%which produces: -%\DTLrowcount{mydata}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnewdbentry} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLnewdbentry}\marg{db name}\marg{key}\marg{value} -%\end{definition} -%This creates a new entry with the identifier \meta{key} whose value -%is \meta{value} and adds it to the current row of the database -%called \meta{db name}. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Smith} -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{John} -%\end{verbatim} -%Adds an entry with identifier \texttt{Surname} and value -%\texttt{Smith} to the current row of the database named -%\texttt{mydata}, and then adds an entry with identifier -%\texttt{FirstName} and value \texttt{John}. -% -%Note that database entries can't contain paragraph breaks as -%many of the macros used by \sty{datatool} are short commands. -%If you do need a paragraph break in an entry, you can instead -%use the command: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpar} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLpar} -%\end{definition} -% -%\subsection{Loading a Database from an External ASCII File} -%\label{sec:loaddb} -% -%Instead of using the commands described in \autoref{sec:newdb} -%to create a new database, you can load a database from an -%external ASCII file using: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLloaddb} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLloaddb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename} -%\end{definition} -%This creates a new database called \meta{db name}, and fills -%it with the entries given in the file \meta{filename}. -%The filename must have a header row at the start of the file, -%which provides the \meta{key} when creating a new database entry -%using \ics{DTLnewdbentry}. By default, the entries in the database -%must be separated by a comma, and optionally delimited by the -%double quote character (\verb|"|). The separator can be changed -%to a tab separator using the command: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsettabseparator} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsettabseparator} -%\end{definition} -%To set the separator to a character other than a tab, you need to use -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetseparator} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsetseparator}\marg{character} -%\end{definition} -%The delimiter can be changed using -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetdelimiter} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsetdelimiter}\marg{character} -%\end{definition} -% -%For example, suppose you have a file called \texttt{mydata.csv} -%which contains the following: -%\begin{verbatim} -%FirstName,Surname,Score -%John,"Smith, Jr",68 -%Jane,Brown,75 -%Andy,Brown,42 -%Z\"oe,Adams,52 -%\end{verbatim} -%then -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloaddb{mydata}{mydata.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%is equivalent to: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{mydata} -%\DTLnewrow{mydata}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{John}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Smith, Jr}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Score}{68}% -%\DTLnewrow{mydata}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{Jane}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Brown}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Score}{75}% -%\DTLnewrow{mydata}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{Andy}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Brown}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Score}{42}% -%\DTLnewrow{mydata}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{FirstName}{Z\"oe}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Score}{52}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Surname}{Adams}% -%\end{verbatim} -%Note that the entry \texttt{Smith, Jr} had to be delimited in -%\texttt{mydata.csv} using the double quote character since it -%contained a comma which is used as the separator. -% -%The file used in the above example contained a \LaTeX\ command, -%namely \verb|\"|. When using \ics{DTLloaddb} all the special -%characters that appear in the command retain their \LaTeX\ meaning -%when the file is loaded. It is likely however that the data file -%may have been created by another application that is not \TeX-aware, -%for example a spreadsheet application. For example, suppose you -%have a file called, say, \texttt{products.csv} which looks -%like: -%\begin{verbatim} -%Product,Cost -%Fruit & Veg,$1.25 -%Stationary,$0.80 -%\end{verbatim} -%This file contains two of \TeX's special characters, namely -%"&" and \verb|$|. In this case, if you try to load the file -%using \ics{DTLloaddb}, you will encounter errors. Instead you -%can use: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLloadrawdb} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLloadrawdb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename} -%\end{definition} -%This is the same as \ics{DTLloaddb} except that it maps nine of -%the ten special characters onto commands that produce that -%symbol. The only character that retains its active state is the -%backslash character, so you will still need to check the file -%for backslash characters. The mappings used are listed in -%\autoref{tab:rawmappings}. So using the file \texttt{products.csv}, -%as described above, -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloadrawdb{mydata}{products.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%is equivalent to: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{mydata} -%\DTLnewrow{mydata}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Product}{Fruit \& Veg}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Cost}{\$1.25}% -%\DTLnewrow{mydata}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Product}{Stationary}% -%\DTLnewdbentry{mydata}{Cost}{\$0.80}% -%\end{verbatim} -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Special character mappings used by \cs{DTLloadrawdb} -%(note that the backslash retains its active state)} -%\label{tab:rawmappings} -%\begin{center} -%\begin{tabular}{ll} -%Character & Mapping\\ -%\verb|%| & \verb|\%|\\ -%\verb|$| & \verb|\$|\\ -%\verb|&| & \verb|\&|\\ -%\verb|#| & \verb|\#|\\ -%\verb|_| & \verb|\_|\\ -%\verb|{| & \verb|\{|\\ -%\verb|}| & \verb|\}|\\ -%\verb|~| & \cs{textasciitilde}\\ -%\verb|^| & \cs{textasciicircum} -%\end{tabular} -%\end{center} -%\end{table} -% -%It may be that there are other characters that require mapping. -%For example, the file \texttt{products.csv} may instead look like:\par -%\vskip\baselineskip -%\begin{ttfamily}\obeylines\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} -%Product,Cost -%Fruit \& Veg,\pounds1.25 -%Stationary,\pounds0.80 -%\end{ttfamily} -%\vskip\baselineskip -%The pound character is not an internationally standard keyboard -%character, and does not achieve the desired effect when used -%in a \LaTeX\ document. It will therefore be necessary to convert -%this symbol to an appropriate control sequence. This can be done -%using the command: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLrawmap} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLrawmap}\marg{string}\marg{replacement} -%\end{definition} -%For example:\par -%\vskip\baselineskip -%\begin{ttfamily}\obeylines\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} -%\cs{DTLrawmap}\char`\{\pounds\char`\}\char`\{\cs{pounds}\char`\} -%\end{ttfamily} -%\vskip\baselineskip\noindent -%will convert all occurrences\footnote{in the \LaTeX\ database, not -%in the data file itself!} of \texttt{\pounds} with \cs{pounds}. -% -%Note that the warning in the previous section about no paragraph -%breaks in an entry also applies to entries loaded from a database. -%If you do need a paragraph break, use \ics{DTLpar} instead of -%\cs{par}, but remember that each row of data in an external data file -%must not have a line break. -% -%\subsection{Iterating Through a Database} -%\label{sec:dbforeach} -% -%Once you have created a database, either loading it from an -%external file, as described in \autoref{sec:loaddb}, or using the -%commands described in \autoref{sec:newdb}, you can then iterate -%through each row of the database and access elements in that row. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLforeach} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLforeach}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{values}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This will iterate through each row of the database called -%\meta{db name}, applying \meta{text} to each row of the database -%where \meta{condition} is met. The argument \meta{values} is a -%comma separated list of \meta{cmd}"="\meta{key} pairs. At the -%start of each row, each command \meta{cmd} in the \meta{values} -%list will be set to the value of the entry given by \meta{key}. -%These commands may then be used in \meta{text}. -%Note that this assignment is done globally to ensure that -%\cs{DLTforeach} works correctly in a \env{tabular} environment. -%Since you may want to use the same set of commands in a later -%\cs{DTLforeach}, the commands are not checked to determine if they -%already exist. It is therefore important that you check you -%are not using an existing command whose value should not be changed. -% -%The optional argument \meta{condition} is a condition in the -%form allowed by \cs{ifthenelse}. This includes the commands -%provided by the \sty{ifthen} package, as well as the commands -%described in \autoref{sec:ifthen}. The default value of -%\meta{condition} is "\boolean{true}". -% -%\begin{example}{Student scores}{ex:scores} -%Suppose you have a data file called \texttt{studentscores.csv} that -%contains the following: -%\begin{verbatim} -%FirstName,Surname,StudentNo,Score -%John,"Smith, Jr",102689,68 -%Jane,Brown,102647,75 -%Andy,Brown,103569,42 -%Z\"oe,Adams,105987,52 -%Roger,Brady,106872,58 -%Clare,Verdon,104356,45 -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{scores}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{John}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Smith, Jr}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{102689}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{68}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Jane}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Brown}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{102647}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{75}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Andy}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Brown}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{103569}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{42}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Z\"oe}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{52}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{105987}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Adams}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Roger}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{58}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{106872}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Brady}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{scores}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{FirstName}{Clare}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Score}{45}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{StudentNo}{104356}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{scores}{Surname}{Verdon}\relax -%and you load the data into a database called "scores" using: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloaddb{scores}{studentscores.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%you can then display the database in a table as follows: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores}\label{tab:scores} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)% -%\DTLforeach{scores}{% -%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{% -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{tab:scores}. (Note that since I didn't -%need the student registration number, I didn't bother to -%assign a command to the key "StudentNo".) -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores}\label{tab:scores} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{example} -% -%The macro \ics{DTLforeach} may be nested up to three times. Each -%level uses the corresponding counters: -%\counterfmt{DTLrowi}, -%\counterfmt{DTLrowii} and -%\counterfmt{DTLrowiii} that keep track of -%the current row. Note that these counters are only incremented -%when \meta{condition} is satisfied. These counters are incremented -%using \cs{refstepcounter} before the start of \meta{text}, so they -%may be referenced using \cs{label}, however remember that \cs{label} -%references the last counter to be incremented using -%\cs{refstepcounter} \emph{in the current scope}. The \cs{label} -%should therefore be the first command in \meta{text} to ensure -%that it references the current row counter. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLcurrentindex} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLcurrentindex} -%\end{definition} -%At the start of each iteration, \cs{DTLcurrentindex} is set -%to the arabic value of the current row counter. -% -%\begin{example}{Student Scores---Labelling}{ex:label} -%In the previous example, the student scores, stored in the -%database "scores" were placed in a table. In this example the -%table will be modified slightly to number each student according -%to the row. Suppose I also want to identify which row Jane Brown -%is in, and reference it in the text. The easiest way to do this -%is to construct a label on each row which uniquely identifies -%that student. The label can't simply be constructed from the -%surname, as there are two students with the same surname. In order -%to create a unique label, I can either construct a label from -%both the surname and the first name, or I can use the student's -%registration number, or I can use the student's score, since all -%the scores are unique. The former method will cause a problem since -%one of the names (Z\"oe) contains an accent command. Although -%the registration numbers are all unique, they are not particularly -%memorable, so I shall instead use the scores. -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores}\label{tab:scoreslab} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{cllc} -%\bfseries Row & -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)% -%\DTLforeach{scores}{% -%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{% -%\label{row:\score}\\\theDTLrowi & -%\firstname & \surname & \score}% -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -% -%Jane Brown scored the highest (75\%), her score can be seen on -%row~\ref{row:75}. -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{tab:scoreslab} and the following text: -%Jane Brown scored the highest (75\%), her score can be seen on -%row~\ref*{row:75}. -% -%\textbf{Note:} the \cs{label} command is placed before -%"\\" to ensure that it is in the same scope as the command -%"\refstepcounter{DTLrowi}". -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores}\label{tab:scoreslab} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{cllc} -%\bfseries Row & -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\label{row:\score}\\\theDTLrowi & -%\firstname & \surname & \score}\relax -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{example} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsavelastrowcount} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsavelastrowcount}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This command will store the value of the row counter used in -%the last occurrence of \ics{DTLforeach} in the control sequence -%\meta{cmd}. -% -%\begin{example}{Filtering Rows}{ex:filter} -%As mentioned earlier, the optional argument \meta{condition} of -%\ics{DTLforeach} provides a means to exclude certain rows. -%This example uses the database defined in \autoref{ex:scores}, -%but only displays the information for students whose marks are -%above 60. At the end of the table, \cs{DTLsavelastrowcount} -%is used to store the number of rows in the table. (Note that -%\cs{DTLsavelastrowcount} is outside of \ics{DTLforeach}.) -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Top Student Scores}\label{tab:topscores} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)% -%\DTLforeach[\DTLisgt{\score}{60}]{scores}{% -%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{% -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -% -%\DTLsavelastrowcount{\n}% -%\n\ students scored above 60\%. -%\end{table} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{tab:topscores}. Note that in this example, -%I could have specified the condition as "\score>60" since all -%the scores are integers, however, as it's possible that an entry -%may feasibly have a decimal score I have used \ics{DTLisgt} instead. -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Top Student Scores}\label{tab:topscores} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach[\DTLisgt{\score}{60}]{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -% -%\DTLsavelastrowcount{\n}\relax -%\n\ students scored above 60\%. -%\end{table} -% -%Suppose now, I only want to display the scores for students whose -%surname begins with `B'. I can do this as follows: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores (B)}\label{tab:Bscores} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)% -%\DTLforeach[\DTLisgt{\surname}{B}\and\DTLislt{\surname}{C}]{scores}{% -%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{% -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{tab:Bscores}. -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores (B)}\label{tab:Bscores} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach[\DTLisgt{\surname}{B}\and\DTLislt{\surname}{C}]{scores} -%{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -% -%\end{example} -% -%Within the body of \ics{DTLforeach} (i.e.\ within \meta{text}) -%the following conditionals may be used: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiffirstrow} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLiffirstrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If the current row is the first row, then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLiflastrow} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLiflastrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If the current row is the last row, then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLifoddrow} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifoddrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%If the current row number is an odd number, then do \meta{true part}, -%otherwise do \meta{false part}. -% -%\begin{example}{Stripy Tables}{ex:stripy} -%This example uses the same database as in the previous examples. -%It requires the \sty{colortbl} package, which provides the -%command \cs{rowcolor}. The command \cs{DTLifoddrow} is used -%to produce a striped table. -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{A Stripy Table}\label{tab:stripy} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llc} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)% -%\DTLforeach{scores}{% -%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{% -%\\\DTLifoddrow{\rowcolor{blue}}{\rowcolor{green}}% -%\firstname & \surname & \score}% -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{tab:stripy}. -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{A Stripy Table}\label{tab:stripy} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llc} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\\\DTLifoddrow{\rowcolor{blue}}{\rowcolor{green}}\relax -%\firstname & \surname & \score}\relax -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{example} -% -%\begin{example}{Two Database Rows per Tabular Row}{ex:2rows} -%In order to save space, you may want two database rows per -%tabular row, when displaying a database in a \env{tabular} -%environment. This can be accomplished using \ics{DTLifoddrow}. -%For example -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Two Database Rows per Tabular Row}\label{tab:2rows} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llcllc} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%) & -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\DTLifoddrow{\\}{&}\relax -%\firstname & \surname & \score}\relax -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{verbatim} -%produces \autoref{tab:2rows} -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Two Database Rows per Tabular Row}\label{tab:2rows} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llcllc} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%) & -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\DTLifoddrow{\\}{&}\relax -%\firstname & \surname & \score}\relax -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{example} -% -%\begin{example}{Nested \cs{DTLforeach}}{ex:nested} -%In this example I have a CSV file called "index.csv" which -%contains: -%\begin{verbatim} -%File,Temperature,NaCl,pH -%exp25a.csv,25,4.7,0.5 -%exp25b.csv,25,4.8,1.5 -%exp30a.csv,30,5.12,4.5 -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{index}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{index}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{File}{exp25a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{Temperature}{25}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{NaCl}{4.7}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{pH}{0.5}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{index}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{File}{exp25b.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{Temperature}{25}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{NaCl}{4.8}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{pH}{1.5}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{index}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{File}{exp30a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{Temperature}{30}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{NaCl}{5.12}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{index}{pH}{4.5}\relax -%The first column of this file contains the name of another -%CSV file which has the results of a time to growth experiment -%performed at the given incubation temperature, salt concentration -%and pH. The file "exp25a.csv" contains the following: -%\begin{verbatim} -%Time,Log Count -%0,3.75 -%23,3.9 -%45,4.0 -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{exp25a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{exp25a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Time}{0}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Log Count}{3.75}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{exp25a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Time}{23}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Log Count}{3.9}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{exp25a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Time}{45}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25a.csv}{Log Count}{4.0}\relax -%The file "exp25b.csv" contains the following: -%\begin{verbatim} -%Time,Log Count -%0,3.6 -%60,3.8 -%120,4.0 -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{exp25b.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{exp25b.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Time}{0}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Log Count}{3.6}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{exp25b.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Time}{60}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Log Count}{3.8}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{exp25b.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Time}{120}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp25b.csv}{Log Count}{4.0}\relax -%The file "exp30a.csv" contains the following: -%\begin{verbatim} -%Time,Log Count -%0,3.73 -%23,3.67 -%60,4.9 -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{exp30a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{exp30a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Time}{0}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Log Count}{3.73}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{exp30a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Time}{23}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Log Count}{3.67}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{exp30a.csv}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Time}{60}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{exp30a.csv}{Log Count}{4.9}\relax -%Suppose I now want to iterate through "index.csv", load the given -%file, and create a table for that data. I can do this using -%nested \ics{DTLforeach} as follows: -%\begin{verbatim} -%% load index data file -%\DTLloaddb{index}{index.csv} -% -%% iterate through index database -%\DTLforeach{index}{\theFile=File,\theTemp=Temperature,% -%\theNaCl=NaCl,\thepH=pH}{% -%% load results file into database of the same name -%\DTLloaddb{\theFile}{\theFile}% -%% Create a table -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Temperature = \theTemp, NaCl = \theNaCl, -%pH = \thepH}\label{tab:\theFile} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{rl} -%\bfseries Time & \bfseries Log Count -%\DTLforeach{\theFile}{\theTime=Time,\theLogCount=Log Count}{% -%\\\theTime & \theLogCount}% -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%} -%\end{verbatim} -%This creates \autoref{tab:exp25a.csv} to \autoref{tab:exp30a.csv}. -%(Note that each table is given a label that is based on the -%database name, to ensure that it is unique.) -% -%\DTLforeach{index}{\theFile=File,\theTemp=Temperature,\theNaCl -%=NaCl,\thepH=pH}{ -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Temperature = \theTemp, NaCl = \theNaCl, -%pH = \thepH}\label{tab:\theFile} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{rl} -%\bfseries Time & \bfseries Log Count -%\DTLforeach{\theFile}{\theTime=Time,\theLogCount=Log Count}{ -%\\\theTime & \theLogCount}% -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%} -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Editing Database Rows} -% -%In the body of the \ics{DTLforeach} loop, you can use the following -%to edit the current row: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLappendtorow} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLappendtorow}\marg{key}\marg{value} -%\end{definition} -%This appends a new entry with the given \meta{key} and \meta{value} -%to the current row. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLreplaceentryforrow} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLreplaceentryforrow}\marg{key}\marg{value} -%\end{definition} -%This replaces the entry for \meta{key} with \meta{value}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLremoveentryfromrow} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLremoveentryfromrow}\marg{key} -%\end{definition} -%This the entry for \meta{key} from the current row. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLremovecurrentrow} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLremovecurrentrow} -%\end{definition} -%This removes the current row from the database. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLforeachkeyinrow} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLforeachkeyinrow}\marg{cmd}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This iterates through each key in the current row, assigns -%\meta{cmd} to the value of that key, and does \meta{text}. -%(\meta{cmd} must be a control sequence.) -% -%\begin{example}{Editing Database Rows}{ex:editdb} -%In this example I have a CSV file called "marks.csv" that contains -%student marks for three assignments: -%\DTLnewdb{marks}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{John}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Smith, Jr}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{102689}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{68}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{57}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{72}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Jane}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Brown}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{102647}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{75}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{84}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{80}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Andy}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Brown}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{103569}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{42}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{52}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{54}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Z\"oe}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Adams}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{105987}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{52}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{48}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{57}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Roger}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Brady}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{106872}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{58}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{60}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{62}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{marks}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{FirstName}{Clare}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Surname}{Verdon}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{StudentNo}{104356}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 1}{45}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 2}{50}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{marks}{Assignment 3}{48}\relax -%\begin{ttfamily}\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\par -%Surname,FirstName,StudentNo,Assignment 1,Assignment 2,Assignment 3 -% -%\DTLforeach{marks}{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\regNo -%=StudentNo,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII -%=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3}{\relax -%\surname,\firstname,\regNo,\assignI,\assignII\assignIII\par -%} -%\end{ttfamily}\par\noindent -%First load this into a database called "marks": -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloaddb{marks}{marks.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%Suppose now I want to compute the average mark for each -%student, and append this to the database. I can do this as -%follows: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLforeach{marks}{% -%\assignI=Assignment 1,% -%\assignII=Assignment 2,% -%\assignIII=Assignment 3}{% -%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}% -%\DTLappendtorow{Average}{\theMean}} -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLforeach{marks}{\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII -%=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3}{\relax -%\DTLmeanforall{\theMean}{\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}% -%\DTLappendtorow{Average}{\theMean}}\relax -%For each row in the "marks" database, I now have an extra key -%called "Average" that contains the average mark over all three -%assignments for a given student. I can now put this data into -%a table: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Marks} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llrrrr} -%\bfseries Surname & \bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Assign 1 & -%\bfseries Assign 2 & -%\bfseries Assign 3 & -%\bfseries Average Mark% -%\DTLforeach{marks}{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\average -%=Average,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII -%=Assignment 3}{\\\surname -%& \firstname & \assignI & \assignII & \assignIII & -%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2}\average}\relax -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{tab:meanmarks}. -% -%Note that if I only wanted the averages for the table and nothing -%else, I could simply have computed the average in each row of the -%table and displayed it without adding the information to the -%database, however I am going to reuse this information in -%\autoref{ex:multibar}, so adding it to the database means that -%I don't need to recompute the mean. -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Marks}\label{tab:meanmarks} -%\centering -%\begin{tabular}{llrrrr} -%\bfseries Surname & \bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Assign 1 & -%\bfseries Assign 2 & -%\bfseries Assign 3 & -%\bfseries Average Mark\relax -%\DTLforeach{marks}{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\average -%=Average,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII -%=Assignment 3}{\\\surname -%& \firstname & \assignI & \assignII & \assignIII & -%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2}\average}\relax -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -% -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Arithmetical Computations on Database Entries} -% -%The commands used in \autoref{sec:fp} can be used on database -%entries. You can, of course, directly use the commands provided -%by the \sty{fp} package if you know that the values are in the -%correct format (i.e.\ no currency symbols, no number group -%separators and a full stop as the decimal point) but if this may -%not be the case, then you should use the commands described in -%\autoref{sec:fp}. If you want to use a command provided by the -%\sty{fp} package, that does not have a wrapper function in -%\sty{datatool}, then you will need to convert the value using -%\ics{DTLconverttodecimal}, and convert it back using either -%\ics{DTLdecimaltolocale} or \ics{DTLdecimaltocurrency}. -% -%\begin{example}{Arithmetical Computations}{ex:mean} -%In this example, I am going to produce a table similar to -%\autoref{tab:scores}, except that I want to add an extra row at the -%end which contains the average score. -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores (Including Average)}\label{tab:mean} -%\centering -%\def\total{0}% -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)% -%\DTLforeach{scores}{% -%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{% -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & -%\DTLgadd{\total}{\score}{\total}% -%\score -%}\\ -%\multicolumn{2}{l}{\bfseries Average Score} & -%\DTLsavelastrowcount{\n}% -%\DTLdiv{\average}{\total}{\n}% -%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2}% -%\average -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{tab:mean}. -%\textbf{Notes:} -%\begin{itemize} -%\item I had to use \ics{DTLgadd} rather than \ics{DTLadd} since it -%occurs within a \env{tabular} environment which puts each entry -%in a local scope. -% -%\item I used \ics{DTLsavelastrowcount} to store the number of -%rows produced by \ics{DTLforeach} in the control sequence \cs{n}. -% -%\item I used \ics{DTLround} to round the average score to 2 decimal -%places. -%\end{itemize} -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores (Including Average)}\label{tab:mean} -%\centering -%\def\total{0}\relax -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & -%\DTLgadd{\total}{\score}{\total}\relax -%\score -%}\\ -%\multicolumn{2}{l}{\bfseries Average Score} & -%\DTLsavelastrowcount{\n}\relax -%\DTLdiv{\average}{\total}{\n}\relax -%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2}\relax -%\average -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{example} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsumforkeys} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsumforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This command sums all the entries over all the databases listed in -%the comma separated list of database names \meta{db list} for each key in -%\meta{key list} where the condition given by -%\meta{condition} is true. The result is stored in \meta{cmd} -%which must be a control sequence. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsumforkeys{scores}{Score}{\total} -%\end{verbatim} -%sets \cs{total} to the sum of all the scores in the database -%called "scores". -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmeanforkeys} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmeanforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This command computes the arithmetic mean of all the entries over -%all the databases listed in \meta{db list} for all keys in \meta{key list} where -%the condition -%given by \meta{condition} is true. The result is stored in \meta{cmd} -%which must be a control sequence. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLmeanforkeys{scores}{Score}{\average} -%\end{verbatim} -%sets \cs{average} to the mean of all the scores in the database -%called "scores". -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLvarianceforkeys} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLvarianceforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This command computes the variance of all the entries over -%all the databases listed in \meta{db list} for all keys in \meta{key list} where -%the condition -%given by \meta{condition} is true. The result is stored in \meta{cmd} -%which must be a control sequence. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsdforkeys} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsdforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This command computes the standard deviation of all the entries over -%all the databases listed in \meta{db list} for all keys in \meta{key list} where -%the condition -%given by \meta{condition} is true. The result is stored in \meta{cmd} -%which must be a control sequence. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLminforkeys} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLminforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This command determines the minimum value over all entries -%for all keys in \meta{key list} over all the databases listed in \meta{db list} -%and stores -%in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. For example -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLminforkeys{scores}{Score}{\theMin} -%\end{verbatim} -%sets \cs{theMin} to the minimum score in the database. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmaxforkeys} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmaxforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%This command determines the maximum value over all entries -%for all keys in \meta{key list} over all the databases listed in \meta{db list} -%and stores -%in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. For example -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLminforkeys{scores}{Score}{\theMax} -%\end{verbatim} -%sets \cs{theMax} to the minimum score in the database. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLcomputebounds} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLcomputebounds}\marg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{x key}\marg{y key}\marg{minX cmd}\marg{minY cmd}\marg{maxX cmd}\marg{maxY cmd} -%\end{definition} -%Computes the maximum and minimum $x$ and $y$ values over all -%the databases listed in \meta{db list} where the $x$ value -%is given by \meta{x key} and the $y$ value is given by -%\meta{y key}. The results are stored in \meta{minX cmd}, -%\meta{minY cmd}, \meta{maxX cmd} and \meta{maxY cmd}. -% -%\begin{example}{Mail Merging}{ex:mailmerging} -%This example uses the database given in \autoref{ex:scores} and -%uses \ics{DTLmeanforkey} to determine the average score. A letter -%is then created for each student to inform them of their score -%and the class average. -% -%\begin{verbatim} -%\documentclass{letter} -% -%\usepackage{datatool} -% -%\begin{document} -%% load database -%\DTLloaddb{scores}{studentscores.csv} -%% compute arithmetic mean for key `Score' -%\DTLmeanforkey{scores}{Score}{\average} -%% Round the average to 2 decimal places -%\DTLround{\average}{\average}{2} -%% Save the highest score in \maxscore -%\DTLmaxforkey{scores}{Score}{\maxscore} -% -%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,% -%\score=Score}{% -%\begin{letter}{} -%\opening{Dear \firstname\ \surname} -% -%\DTLifnumgt{\score}{60}{Congratulations you}{You} achieved a score -%of \score\% which was \DTLifnumgt{\score}{\average}{above}{below} -%the average of \average\%. \DTLifnumeq{\score}{\maxscore}{You -%achieved the highest score}{The top score was \maxscore}. -% -%\closing{Yours Sincerely} -%\end{letter} -%} -%\end{document} -%\end{verbatim} -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Sorting a Database} -%\label{sec:sort} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsort} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsort}\marg{sort criteria}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -%This will sort the database called \meta{db name} according to -%the criteria given by \meta{sort criteria}, which must be a -%comma separated list of keys and optionally "="\meta{order}, where -%\meta{order} is either "ascending" or "descending". If the order -%is omitted, "ascending" is assumed. The database keeps track of -%the data type for a given key, and uses this to determine whether -%an alphabetical or numerical sort is required. -% -%\begin{example}{Sorting a Database}{ex:sort} -%This example uses the database called "scores" defined in -%\autoref{ex:scores}. First, I am going to sort the database -%according to the student scores in descending order (highest to -%lowest) and display the database in a table -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores (Sorted by Score)}\label{tab:sortscores} -%\centering -%\DTLsort{Score=descending}{scores}% -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)% -%\DTLforeach{scores}{% -%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{% -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{tab:sortscores}. -% -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores (Sorted by Score)}\label{tab:sortscores} -%\centering -%\DTLsort{Score=descending}{scores}\relax -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\\ -%\firstname & \surname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -% -%Now I am going to sort the database according to -%surname and then first name, and display it in a table. Note that -%since I want to sort in ascending order, I can omit the -%"=ascending" part of the sort criteria. I have also decided to -%reverse the first and second columns, so that the surname is -%in the first column. -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores (Sorted by Name)}\label{tab:sortname} -%\centering -%\DTLsort{Surname,FirstName}{scores}% -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Score (\%)% -%\DTLforeach{scores}{% -%\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{% -%\\ -%\surname & \firstname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{tab:sortname}. -%\begin{table}[htbp] -%\caption{Student Scores (Sorted by Name)}\label{tab:sortname} -%\centering -%\DTLsort{Surname,FirstName}{scores}\relax -%\begin{tabular}{llr} -%\bfseries Surname & -%\bfseries First Name & -%\bfseries Score (\%)\relax -%\DTLforeach{scores}{\firstname=FirstName,\surname=Surname,\score=Score}{\relax -%\\ -%\surname & \firstname & \score} -%\end{tabular} -%\end{table} -% -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Saving a Database to an External File} -%\label{sec:savedb} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsavedb} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsavedb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename} -%\end{definition} -%This writes the database called \meta{db name} to a file called -%\meta{filename}. The separator and delimiter characters used -%are as given by \ics{DTLsetseparator} (or \ics{DTLsettabseparator}) -%and \ics{DTLsetdelimiter}. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLsettabdelimiter -%\DTLsavedb{scores}{scores.txt} -%\end{verbatim} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsavetexdb} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsavetexdb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename} -%\end{definition} -%This writes the database called \meta{db name} to a \LaTeX\ file -%called \meta{filename}, where the database is stored as -%a combination of \ics{DTLnewdb}, \ics{DTLnewrow} and \ics{DTLnewdbentry} commands. -% -%\section{Pie Charts (\texorpdfstring{\sty{datapie}}{datapie} package)} -% -%The \sty{datapie} package is not loaded by the \sty{datatool} package, -%so you need to load \sty{datapie} if you want to use any of the -%commands defined in this section. You will need to have the -%\sty{pgf}/\sty{tikz} packages installed. The \sty{datapie} package -%may be given the following options: -%\begin{description} -%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{color}}] Colour option (default.) -%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{monochrome}}] Monochrome option. -%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{rotateinner}}] -%Rotate inner labels so that they are aligned -%with the pie chart radial axis. -%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{norotateinner}}] -%Don't rotate inner labels (default.) -%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{rotateouter}}] -%Rotate outer labels so that they are aligned -%with the pie chart radial axis. -%\item[{\pkgopt[datapie]{norotateouter}}] -%Don't rotate outer labels (default.) -%\end{description} -% -%Numerical information contained in a database created by the -%\sty{datatool} package can be converted into a pie chart using -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpiechart} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLpiechart}\oarg{condition}\marg{settings list}\marg{db name}\marg{values} -%\end{definition}\noindent -%where \meta{db name} is the name of the database, and -%\meta{condition} has the same form as the optional argument -%to \ics{DTLforeach} described in \autoref{sec:dbforeach}. If -%\meta{condition} is false, that information is omitted from the -%construction of the pie chart. The argument \meta{values} is a -%comma separated list of \meta{cmd}"="\meta{key} pairs, the same -%as that required by the penultimate argument of \ics{DTLforeach}. -%The \meta{settings list} is a comma separated list of -%\meta{setting}=\meta{value} pairs, where \meta{setting} can be any of -%the following: -%\begin{description} -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{variable}] -%This specifies the control sequence to use that -%contains the value used to construct the pie chart. The control -%sequence must be one of the control sequences to appear in -%the assignment list \meta{values}. This setting is required. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{start}] -%This is the starting angle of the first segment. The -%value is 0 by default. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{radius}] -%This is the radius of the pie chart. The default value -%is 2cm. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{innerratio}] -%The distance from the centre of the -%pie chart to the point where the inner labels are placed is given -%by this value multiplied by the ratio. The default value is 0.5. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{outerratio}] -%The distance from the centre of the -%pie chart to the point where the outer labels are placed is given -%by this value multiplied by the ratio. The default value is 1.25. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayratio}] -%The distance from the centre of the pie chart -%to the point of cutaway segments is given by this value multiplied -%by the ratio. The default value is 0.2. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{inneroffset}] -%This is the absolute distance from the centre -%of the pie chart to the point where the inner labels are placed. -%You should use only one or other of \setting{DTLpiechart}{innerratio} -%and \setting{DTLpiechart}{inneroffset}, not both. If you also want to -%specify the radius, you must use \setting{DTLpiechart}{ratio} -%before \setting{DTLpiechart}{inneroffset}. If omitted, the inner -%offset is obtained from the ratio multiplied by the -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{innerratio} value. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{outeroffset}] -%This is the absolute distance from the centre -%of the pie chart to the point where the outer labels are placed. -%You should use only one or other of \setting{DTLpiechart}{outerratio} -%and \setting{DTLpiechart}{outeroffset}, not both. If you also want to -%specify the radius, you must use \setting{DTLpiechart}{ratio} -%before \setting{DTLpiechart}{outeroffset}. If omitted, the outer -%offset is obtained from the ratio multiplied by the -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{outerratio} value. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayoffset}] -%This is the absolute distance from the centre of -%the pie chart to the point of the cutaway segments. You should use -%only one or other of \setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayratio} and -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayoffset}, not both. If -%you also want to specify the radius, you must use -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{ratio} before -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayoffset}. If omitted, the cutaway offset -%is obtained from the ratio multiplied by the -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayratio} value. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutaway}] -%This is a list of cutaway segments. This should be -%a comma separated list of individual numbers, or number ranges -%(separated by a dash.) For example "cutaway={1,3}" will separate -%the first and third segments from the rest of the pie chart, offset -%by the value of the \setting{DTLpiechart}{cutawayoffset} setting, -%whereas "cutaway={1-3}" will separate the -%first three segments from the rest of the pie chart. If omitted, -%the pie chart will be whole. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{innerlabel}] -%The value of this is positioned in the middle of each segment at a -%distance of \setting{DTLpiechart}{inneroffset} from the centre -%of the pie chart. The default is the same as the value of -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{variable}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{outerlabel}] -%The value of this is positioned at a distance of -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{outeroffset} from the centre of the pie chart. -%The default is empty. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{rotateinner}] This is a boolean setting, -%so it can only take the values "true" and "false". If the value is -%omitted "true" is assumed. If true, the inner labels are rotated -%along the spokes of the pie chart, otherwise the inner labels are not -%rotated. There are analogous package options -%\pkgopt[datapie]{rotateinner} and \pkgopt[datapie]{norotateinner}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLpiechart}{rotateouter}] -%This is a boolean setting, so it can only take -%the values "true" and "false". If the value is omitted "true" is -%assumed. If true, the outer labels are rotated along the spokes of -%the pie chart, otherwise the outer labels are not rotated. -%There are analogous package options -%\pkgopt[datapie]{rotateouter} and \pkgopt[datapie]{norotateouter}. -% -%\end{description} -% -%\begin{example}{A Pie Chart}{ex:piechart} -%This example loads data from a file called "fruit.csv" which contains -%the following: -%\begin{verbatim} -%Name,Quantity -%"Apples",30 -%"Pears",25 -%"Lemons,Limes",40.5 -%"Peaches",34.5 -%"Cherries",20 -%\end{verbatim} -%First load the data: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloaddb{fruit}{fruit.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{fruit}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Apples}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{30}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Pears}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{25}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Lemons,Limes}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{40.5}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Peaches}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{34.5}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{fruit}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Name}{Cherries}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{fruit}{Quantity}{20}\relax -%Now create a pie chart in a figure: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This creates \autoref{fig:piechart}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart} -%\label{fig:piechart} -%\end{figure} -% -%There are no outer labels by default, but they can be set -%using the \setting{DTLpiechart}{outerlabel} setting. -%The following sets the outer label to the value of the "Name" key: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Outer labels set)} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This creates \autoref{fig:piechartouter}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name}{fruit} -%{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Outer labels set)} -%\label{fig:piechartouter} -%\end{figure} -% -%You may prefer the labels to be rotated. The following -%switches on the rotation for the inner and outer labels: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name,% -%rotateinner,rotateouter}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Rotation enabled)} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This creates \autoref{fig:piechartrot}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name -%,rotateinner,rotateouter}{fruit} -%{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Rotation enabled)} -%\label{fig:piechartrot} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\begin{example}{Separating Segments from the Pie Chart}{ex:cutaway} -%You may want to separate one or more segments from the pie chart, -%perhaps to emphasize them. You can do this using the -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{cutaway} -%setting. The following separates the first and third segments -%from the pie chart: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name,% -%cutaway={1,3}}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:piecutaway}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name -%,cutaway={1,3}}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments} -%\label{fig:piecutaway} -%\end{figure} -% -%Alternatively I can specify a range of segments. The following -%separates the first two segments: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name,% -%cutaway={1-2}}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments (\texttt{cutaway=\{1-2\}})} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:piecutaway2}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name -%,cutaway={1-2}}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments (\texttt{cutaway=\{1-2\}})} -%\label{fig:piecutaway2} -%\end{figure} -% -%Notice the difference between \autoref{fig:piecutaway2} and -%\autoref{fig:piecutaway3} which was produced using: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name,% -%cutaway={1,2}}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments (\texttt{cutaway=\{1,2\}})} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,outerlabel=\name -%,cutaway={1,2}}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart with Cutaway Segments (\texttt{cutaway=\{1,2\}})} -%\label{fig:piecutaway3} -%\end{figure} -% -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Pie Chart Variables} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpievariable} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLpievariable} -%\end{definition} -%This command is set to the variable given by the -%\setting{DTLpiechart}{variable} setting in the \meta{settings list} -%argument of \cs{DTLpiechart}. The \setting{DTLpiechart}{innerlabel} -%is set to \cs{DTLpievariable} by default. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpiepercent} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLpiepercent} -%\end{definition} -%This command is set to the percentage value of \cs{DTLpievariable}. -%The percentage value is rounded to \meta{n} digits, where \meta{n} -%is the value of the \LaTeX\ counter -%\counterfmt{DTLpieroundvar}. -% -%\begin{example}{Changing the Inner and Outer Labels}{ex:pielabels} -%This example uses the database defined in \autoref{ex:piechart}. -%The inner label is now set to the percentage value, rather than -%the actual value, and the outer label is set to the name with -%the actual value in parentheses. -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,% -%innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent\%},% -%outerlabel={\name\ (\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Changing the labels)} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:piechartlabels}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent -%\%},outerlabel={\name\ (\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Changing the labels)} -%\label{fig:piechartlabels} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Pie Chart Label Formatting} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdisplayinnerlabel}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This governs how the inner label is formatted, where \meta{text} -%is the text of the inner label. The default is to just do \meta{text}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplayouterlabel} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdisplayouterlabel}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This governs how the outer label is formatted, where \meta{text} -%is the text of the outer label. The default is to just do \meta{text}. -% -%\begin{example}{Changing the Inner and Outer Label -%Format}{ex:pielabelformat} -%This example extends \autoref{ex:pielabels}. -%The inner and outer labels are now both typeset in a sans-serif -%font: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,% -%innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent\%},% -%outerlabel={\name\ (\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Changing the label format)} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:piechartlabelformat}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent -%\%},outerlabel={\name\ (\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Changing the label format)} -%\label{fig:piechartlabelformat} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Pie Chart Colours} -% -%The \sty{datapie} package predefines colours for the first -%eight segments of the pie chart. If you require more than -%eight segments, you will need to use -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetpiesegmentcolor} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsetpiesegmentcolor}\marg{n}\marg{color} -%\end{definition}\noindent -%to set the colours for any additional segments, or you can use -%it to change the default colours. The first argument \meta{n} -%is the segment index (starting from 1), and the second argument -%\meta{color} is a colour specifier as used in commands such as -%\cs{color}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdopiesegmentcolor} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdopiesegmentcolor}\meta{n} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the current text colour to that of the \meta{n}th -%segment. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the current text colour to that of the current pie -%segment. This command may only be used within a pie chart, or -%within the body of \ics{DTLforeach}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpieoutlinecolor} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLpieoutlinecolor} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the outline colour for the pie chart. The default is -%black. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpieoutlinewidth} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLpieoutlinewidth} -%\end{definition} -%This is a length that governs the line width of the outline. The -%default value is 0pt, but can be changed using \cs{setlength}. -%The outline is only drawn if \cs{DTLpieoutlinewidth} is greater -%than 0pt. -% -%\begin{example}{Pie Segment Colours}{ex:piecolours} -%This example extends \autoref{ex:pielabelformat}. -%It sets the outline thickness to 2pt, and -%the outer label is now set in the same colour as the fill colour -%of the segment to which it belongs. -%In addition, a legend is created using -%\ics{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\setlength{\DTLpieoutlinewidth}{2pt} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{% -%\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor -%\textsf{\shortstack{#1}}} -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,% -%innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent\%},% -%outerlabel={\name\\(\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\begin{tabular}[b]{ll} -%\DTLforeach{fruit}{\name=Name}{\DTLiffirstrow{}{\\}% -%\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor\rule{10pt}{10pt} & -%\name -%} -%\end{tabular} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Using Segment Colours and Outline)} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:piesegcolour}. (The format of the -%outer label has been changed to use \cs{shortstack} to -%prevent the outer labels from taking up so much horizontal -%space. The \setting{DTLpiechart}{outerlabel} setting has also been -%modified to use "\\" after the name to move the percentage value onto -%the next row.) -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\setlength{\DTLpieoutlinewidth}{2pt} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{\relax -%\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor -%\textsf{\shortstack{#1}}} -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity,innerlabel={\DTLpiepercent -%\%},outerlabel={\name\\(\DTLpievariable)}}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\begin{tabular}[b]{ll} -%\DTLforeach{fruit}{\name=Name}{\DTLiffirstrow{}{\\}\relax -%\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor\rule{10pt}{10pt} & -%\name -%} -%\end{tabular} -%\caption{A Pie Chart (Using Segment Colours and Outline)} -%\label{fig:piesegcolour} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Adding Extra Commands Before and After the Pie Chart} -% -%The pie charts created using \ics{DTLpiechart} are placed inside -%a \env{tikzpicture} environment (defined by the \sty{tikz} package.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpieatbegintikz} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLpieatbegintikz} -%\end{definition} -%The macro \cs{DTLpieatbegintikz} is called at the start of the -%\env{tikzpicture} environment, allowing you to change the -%\env{tikzpicture} settings. By default \cs{DTLpieatbegintikz} -%does nothing, but you can redefine it to, say, scale the pie -%chart. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLpieatendtikz} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLpieatendtikz} -%\end{definition} -%The macro \cs{DTLpieatendtikz} is called at the end of the -%\env{tikzpicture} environment, allowing you add additional -%graphics to the pie chart. This does nothing by default. -% -%\begin{example}{Adding Information to the Pie Chart}{ex:piescale} -%This example modifies \autoref{ex:piechart}. It redefines -%\cs{DTLpieatendtikz} to add an annotated arrow. -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity}{fruit}{% -%\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{An Annotated Pie Chart} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:pieannote}. (Note that the centre -%of the pie chart is the origin of the TikZ picture.) -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\renewcommand*{\DTLpieatendtikz}{% -%\draw[<-] (45:1.5cm) -- (40:2.5cm)node[right]{Apples};} -%\DTLpiechart{variable=\quantity}{fruit}{\name=Name,\quantity=Quantity} -%\caption{An Annotated Pie Chart} -%\label{fig:pieannote} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\section{Scatter and Line Plots (\texorpdfstring{\sty{dataplot}}{dataplot} -%package)} -% -%The \sty{dataplot} package provides commands for creating -%scatter or line plots from databases. It uses the pgf/TikZ plot -%handler library to create the plots. See the \sty{pgf} manual for -%more detail on pgf streams and plot handles. The \sty{dataplot} -%package is not loaded by \sty{datatool} so if you want to use -%it you need to load it explicitly using "\usepackage{dataplot}". -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplot} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplot}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{settings} -%\end{definition} -%This command creates a plot (inside a \env{tikzpicture} environment) -%of all the data given in the databases listed in \meta{db list}, -%which should be a comma separated list of database names. -%The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that for -%\ics{DTLforeach}. The \meta{settings} argument is a comma separated -%list of \meta{setting}"="\meta{value} pairs. There are two settings -%that must be specified \setting{DTLplot}{x} and \setting{DTLplot}{y}. -%The other settings are optional. Note that any value that contains -%a comma, must be enclosed in braces. For example -%"colors={red,cyan,blue}". Note where any setting requires -%a number, or list of numbers (such as \setting{DTLplot}{bounds}) -%the number must be supplied in standard decimal notation (i.e.\ -%no currency, no number groups, and a full stop as the decimal -%point.) Available settings are as follows: -%\begin{description} -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{x}] The database key -%that specifies the $x$ co-ordinates. This setting is required. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{y}] The database key that specifies -%the $y$ co-ordinates. This setting is required. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{markcolors}] A comma separated list of colour -%names for the markers. An empty value will use the current colour. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{linecolors}] A comma separated list of colour -%names for the plot lines. An empty value will use the current colour. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{colors}] A comma separated list of colour -%names for the lines and markers. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{marks}] A comma separated list of -%code to generate plot marks. (This should typically be a list -%of \cs{pgfuseplotmark} commands, see the \sty{pgf} manual for -%further details.) You may use \cs{relax} as an element -%of the list to suppress markers for the corresponding plot. -%For example: "marks={\pgfuseplotmark{o},\relax}" will use an -%open circle marker for the first database, and no markers for the -%second database listed in \meta{db list}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{lines}] A comma separated list of -%line style settings. (This should typically be a list of -%\cs{pgfsetdash} commands, see the \sty{pgf} manual for -%further details on how to set the line style.) An empty value -%will use the current line style. -%You may use \cs{relax} as an element -%of the list to suppress line for the corresponding plot. -%For example: "lines={\relax,\pgfsetdash{}{0pt}}" -%will have no lines for the first database, and a solid line -%for the second database listed in \meta{db list}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{width}] The width of the plot. This must -%be a length. The plot width does not include outer tick marks or -%labels. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{height}] The height of the plot. This must -%be a length. The plot height does not include outer tick marks -%or labels. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{style}] This setting governs whether -%to use lines or markers in the plot, and may take one of -%the following values: "both" (lines and markers), -%"lines" (only lines) or "markers" (only markers.) The default is -%"markers". -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{axes}] This setting governs whether -%to display the axes, and may take one of -%the following values: "both", "x", "y" or "none". If no value -%is specified, "both" is assumed. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{box}] This setting governs whether -%or not to surround the plot in a box. It is a boolean setting, -%taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is -%specified, "true" is assumed. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xtics}] This setting governs whether -%or not to display the $x$ tick marks. It is a boolean setting, -%taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is -%specified "true" is assumed. If the \setting{DTLplot}{axes} -%setting is set to "both" or "x", this value will automatically -%be set to "true", otherwise it will be set to "false". -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{ytics}] This setting governs whether -%or not to display the $y$ ticks. It is a boolean setting, -%taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is -%specified "true" is assumed. If the \setting{DTLplot}{axes} -%setting is set to "both" or "y", this value will automatically -%be set to "true", otherwise it will be set to "false". -% -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xminortics}] This setting governs whether -%or not to display the $x$ minor tick marks. It is a boolean -%setting, taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is -%specified "true" is assumed. This setting also sets the -%$x$ major tick marks on if the value is "true". -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yminortics}] This setting governs whether -%or not to display the $y$ minor tick marks. It is a boolean -%setting, taking only the values "true" and "false". If no value is -%specified "true" is assumed. This setting also sets the -%$y$ major tick marks on if the value is "true". -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xticdir}] This sets the $x$ tick direction, -%and may only take the values "in" or "out". -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yticdir}] This sets the $y$ tick direction, -%and may only take the values "in" or "out". -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{ticdir}] This sets the $x$ and $y$ tick -%direction, and may only take the values "in" or "out". -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{bounds}] The value must be in the form -%\meta{min x}","\meta{min y}","\meta{max x}","\meta{max y}. This -%sets the graph bounds to the given values. If omitted the -%bounds are computed from the maximum and minimum values of the -%data. For example -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLplot{data1,data2}{x=Height,y=Weight,bounds={0,0,10,20}} -%\end{verbatim} -%Note that the \setting{DTLplot}{bounds} setting overrides -%the \setting{DTLplot}{minx}, \setting{DTLplot}{maxx}, -%\setting{DTLplot}{miny} and \setting{DTLplot}{maxy} settings. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{minx}] The value is the minimum value -%of the $x$ axis. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{miny}] The value is the minimum value -%of the $y$ axis. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{maxx}] The value is the maximum value -%of the $x$ axis. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{maxy}] The value is the maximum value -%of the $y$ axis. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xticpoints}] The value must be a comma -%separated list of decimal numbers indicating where to put the -%$x$ tick marks. If omitted, the $x$ tick marks are placed at -%equal intervals along the $x$ axis such that each interval is -%not less than the length given by \ics{DTLmintickgap}. -%This setting overrides \setting{DTLplot}{xticgap}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xticgap}] This value specifies the -%gap between the $x$ tick marks. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yticpoints}] The value must be a comma -%separated list of decimal numbers indicating where to put the -%$y$ tick marks. If omitted, the $y$ tick marks are placed at -%equal intervals along the $y$ axis such that each interval is -%not less than the length given by \ics{DTLmintickgap}. -%This setting overrides \setting{DTLplot}{yticgap}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yticgap}] This value specifies the -%gap between the $y$ tick marks. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{grid}] This is a boolean value that -%specifies whether or not to display the grid. If no value -%is given, "true" is assumed. The minor grid lines are only -%displayed if the minor tick marks are set. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xticlabels}] The value must be a comma -%separated list of labels for each $x$ tick mark. If omitted, -%the labels are the value of the $x$ tick position, rounded -%\meta{n} digits after the decimal point, where \meta{n} is -%given by the value of the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{yticlabels}] The value must be a comma -%separated list of labels for each $y$ tick mark. If omitted, -%the labels are the value of the $y$ tick position, rounded -%\meta{n} digits after the decimal point, where \meta{n} is -%given by the value of the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundYvar}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{xlabel}] The value is the label for -%the $x$ axis. If omitted, the axis has no label. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{ylabel}] The value is the label for -%the $y$ axis. If omitted, the axis has no label. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{legend}] This setting governs whether -%or not to display the legend, and where it should be displayed. -%It may take one of the following values "none" (don't display -%the legend), "north", "northeast", "east", "southeast", "south", -%"southwest", "west" or "northwest". If the value is omitted, -%"northeast" is assumed. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLplot}{legendlabels}] The value must be a comma -%separated list of labels for the legend. If omitted, the database -%names are used. -% -%\end{description} -% -%\begin{example}{A Basic Graph}{ex:basicplot} -%Suppose you have a file called "groupa.csv" that contains the -%following: -%\DTLnewdb{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.55}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{45.4}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.54}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{48.0}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.56}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{58.0}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.56}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{50.2}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.57}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{46.0}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.58}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{48.3}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.59}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{56.5}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.59}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{58.1}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.60}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{60.9}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupa}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Height}{1.62}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupa}{Weight}{56.3}\relax -%\begin{ttfamily}\obeylines\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} -%Height,Weight -%\DTLforeach{groupa}{\x=Height,\y=Weight}{\x,\y -%}\end{ttfamily}\par\noindent -%First load this into a database called "groupa": -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloaddb{groupa}{groupa.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%The data can now be converted into a scatter plot as follows: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLplot{groupa}{x=Height,y=Weight} -%\caption{A Scatter Plot} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:basicplot}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLplot{groupa}{x=Height,y=Weight} -%\caption{A Scatter Plot} -%\label{fig:basicplot} -%\end{figure} -% -%Alternatively, you can use the \setting{DTLplot}{style} setting -%to change it into a line plot: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLplot{groupa}{x=Height,y=Weight,style=lines} -%\caption{A Line Plot} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:basiclineplot}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLplot{groupa}{x=Height,y=Weight,style=lines} -%\caption{A Line Plot} -%\label{fig:basiclineplot} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\begin{example}{Plotting Multiple Data Sets}{ex:2db} -%In this example, I shall use the database called "groupa" defined -%in \autoref{ex:basicplot}, and another database called "groupb" -%which is loaded from the file "groupb.csv" which contains the -%following: -%\DTLnewdb{groupb} -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.54}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{48.4}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.54}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{42.0}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.55}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{64.0}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.56}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{58.2}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.56}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{49.0}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.57}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{40.3}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.58}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{51.5}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.58}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{63.1}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.59}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{74.9}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{groupb}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Height}{1.59}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{groupb}{Weight}{59.3}\relax -%\begin{ttfamily}\obeylines\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} -%Height,Weight -%\DTLforeach{groupb}{\x=Height,\y=Weight}{\x,\y -%}\end{ttfamily}\par\noindent -%First load this into a database called "groupb": -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloaddb{groupb}{groupb.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%I can now plot both groups in the same graph, but I want a smaller -%graph than \autoref{fig:basicplot} and \autoref{fig:basiclineplot}, -%so I am going to set the plot width and height to 3in: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight,width=3in,height=3in} -%\caption{A Scatter Plot} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:2db}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight,width=3in,height=3in} -%\caption{A Scatter Plot} -%\end{figure} -%\label{fig:2db} -% -%Now let's add a legend using the \setting{DTLplot}{legend} setting, -%with the legend labels "Group A" and "Group B", -%and set the $x$ tick intervals using \setting{DTLplot}{xticpoints} -%setting. I am also going to set the $x$ axis label to -%"Height (m)" and the $y$ axis label to "Weight (kg)", and place -%a box around the plot. -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight, -%width=3in,height=3in,legend,legendlabels={Group A,Group B}, -%xlabel={Height (m)},ylabel={Weight (kg)},box, -%xticpoints={1.54,1.55,1.56,1.57,1.58,1.59,1.60,1.61,1.62}} -%\caption{A Scatter Plot} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:legend}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight,legend, -%width=3in,height=3in,legendlabels={Group A,Group B}, -%xlabel={Height (m)},ylabel={Weight (kg)},box, -%xticpoints={1.54,1.55,1.56,1.57,1.58,1.59,1.60,1.61,1.62}} -%\caption{A Scatter Plot} -%\label{fig:legend} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Adding Information to the Plot} -% -%The \sty{datatool} package provides two hooks used at the beginning -%and end of the \env{tikzpicture} environment: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotatbegintikz} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotatbegintikz} -%\end{definition}\noindent -%and -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotatendtikz} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotatendtikz} -%\end{definition} -%They are both defined to do nothing by default, but can be redefined -%to add commands to the image. The unit vectors are set prior to -%using these hooks, so you can use the same co-ordinates as those -%in the data sets. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLaddtoplotlegend} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLaddtoplotlegend}\marg{marker}\marg{line style}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This adds a new row to the plot legend where \meta{marker} is -%code to produce the marker, \meta{line style} is code to set -%the line style and \meta{text} is a textual label. You can -%use \cs{relax} to suppress the marker or line. For example: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLaddtoplotlegend{\pgfuseplotmark{x}}{\relax}{Some Data} -%\end{verbatim} -%Note that the legend is plotted before \cs{DTLplotatendtikz}, -%so if you want to add information to the legend you will need -%to do the in \cs{DTLplotatstarttikz}. -% -%\begin{example}{Adding Information to a Plot}{ex:addtoplot} -%Returning to the plots created in \autoref{ex:2db}, suppose -%I now want to annotate the plot, say I want to draw your notice -%to a particular point, say the point (1.58,48.3), then I can -%redefine \cs{DTLplotatendtikz} to draw an annotated arrow to -%that point: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLplotatendtikz}{% -%\draw[<-,line width=1pt] (1.58,48.3) -- (1.6,43) -% node[below]{interesting point}; -%} -%\end{verbatim} -%So \autoref{fig:legend} now looks like \autoref{fig:annote}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\renewcommand*{\DTLplotatendtikz}{% -%\draw[<-,line width=1pt] (1.58,48.3) -- (1.6,43) -% node[below]{interesting point}; -%} -%\centering -%\DTLplot{groupa,groupb}{x=Height,y=Weight,legend, -%width=3in,height=3in,legendlabels={Group A,Group B},box, -%xlabel={Height (m)},ylabel={Weight (kg)}, -%xticpoints={1.54,1.55,1.56,1.57,1.58,1.59,1.60,1.61,1.62}} -%\caption{A Scatter Plot} -%\label{fig:annote} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Global Plot Settings} -% -%\subsubsection{Lengths} -%This section describes the lengths that govern the appearance of -%the plot created using \ics{DTLplot}. These lengths can be -%changed using \cs{setlength}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotwidth} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotwidth} -%\end{definition} -%This length governs the length of the $x$ axis. Note that the plot -%width does not include any outer tick marks or labels. The default -%value is 4in. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotheight} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotheight} -%\end{definition} -%This length governs the length of the $y$ axis. Note that the plot -%height does not include any outer tick marks or labels. The default -%value is 4in -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLticklength} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLticklength} -%\end{definition} -%This governs the length of the tick marks. The default value is -%5pt. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLminorticklength} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLminorticklength} -%\end{definition} -%This governs the length of the minor tick marks. The default value is -%2pt. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLticklabeloffset} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLticklabeloffset} -%\end{definition} -%This governs the distance from the axis to the tick labels. The -%default value is 8pt. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmintickgap} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmintickgap} -%\end{definition} -%This is the minimum distance allowed between tick marks. If the -%plot width or height is less than this distance there will only -%be tick marks at either end of the axis. The default value is -%20pt. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLlegendxoffset} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLlegendxoffset} -%\end{definition} -%This is the horizontal distance from the border of the plot to the -%outer border of the legend. The default value is 10pt. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLlegendyoffset} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLlegendyoffset} -%\end{definition} -%This is the vertical distance from the border of the plot to the -%outer border of the legend. The default value is 10pt. -% -%\subsubsection{Counters} -%These counters govern the appearance of plots -%created using \ics{DTLplot}. The value of the counters can be -%changed using \cs{setcounter}. -% -%\begin{definition} -%\counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar} -%\end{definition} -%Unless you specify your own tick labels, the $x$ tick labels will -%be given by the tick points rounded to \meta{n} digits after the -%decimal point, where \meta{n} is the value of the counter -%\counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar}. -% -%\begin{definition} -%\counterfmt{DTLplotroundYvar} -%\end{definition} -%Unless you specify your own tick labels, the $y$ tick labels will -%be given by the tick points rounded to \meta{n} digits after the -%decimal point, where \meta{n} is the value of the counter -%\counterfmt{DTLplotroundYvar}. -% -%\subsubsection{Macros} -%These macros govern the appearance of plots created using -%\ics{DTLplot}. They can be changed using \cs{renewcommand}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotmarks} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotmarks} -%\end{definition} -%This must be a comma separated list of \sty{pgf} code to create the -%plot marks. \ics{DTLplot} cycles through this list for each -%database listed. The \sty{pgf} package provides convenient commands -%for generating plots using \cs{pgfuseplotmark}. See the \sty{pgf} -%manual for more details. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotmarkcolors} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotmarkcolors} -%\end{definition} -%This must be a comma separated list of defined colours to apply to the -%plot marks. \ics{DTLplot} cycles through this list for each database -%listed. If this macro is set to empty, the current colour will -%be used instead. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotlines} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotlines} -%\end{definition} -%This must be a comma separated list of \sty{pgf} code to set the -%style of the plot lines. \ics{DTLplot} cycles through this list for -%each database listed. Dash patterns can be set using \cs{pgfsetdash}, -%see the \sty{pgf} manual for more details. If \cs{DTLplotlines} is -%set to empty the current line style will be used instead. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotlinecolors} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotlinecolors} -%\end{definition} -%This must be a comma separated list of defined colours to apply to the -%plot lines. \cs{DTLplot} cycles through this list for each database -%listed. If this macro is set to empty, the current colour will -%be used instead. The default is the same as \cs{DTLplotmarkcolors}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLXAxisStyle} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLxaxisstyle} -%\end{definition} -%This governs the style of the $x$ axis. It is passed as the optional -%argument to the TikZ \cs{draw} command. By default it is just "-" -%which is a solid line style with no start or end arrows. The $x$ -%axis line starts from the bottom left corner of the plot and extends -%to the bottom right corner of the plot. So if you want the $x$ axis -%to have an arrow head at the right end, you can do: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLXAxisStyle}{->} -%\end{verbatim} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLYAxisStyle} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLyaxisstyle} -%\end{definition} -%This governs the style of the $y$ axis. It is analogous to -%\cs{DTLxaxisstyle} described above. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmajorgridstyle} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmajorgridstyle} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies the format of the major grid lines. -%It may be set to any TikZ setting that you can pass to the -%optional argument of \cs{draw}. The default value is -%"color=gray,-" which indicates a grey solid line. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLminorgridstyle} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLminorgridstyle} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies the format of the minor grid lines. -%It may be set to any TikZ setting that you can pass to the -%optional argument of \cs{draw}. The default value is -%"color=gray,loosely dotted" which indicates a grey dotted line. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLformatlegend} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLformatlegend}\marg{legend} -%\end{definition} -%This formats the entire legend, which is passed as the argument. -%The default is to set the legend with -%a white background, a black frame. -% -%\subsection{Adding to a Plot Stream} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLplotstream} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotstream}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{x key}\marg{y key} -%\end{definition} -%This adds points to a stream from the database called \meta{db name} -%where the $x$ co-ordinates are given by the key \meta{x key} -%and the $y$ co-ordinates are given by the key \meta{y key}. -%(\ics{DTLconverttodecimal} is used to convert locale dependent -%values to a standard decimal that is recognised by the -%\sty{pgf} package.) -%The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that -%for \ics{DTLforeach}. -% -%\begin{example}{Adding to a Plot Stream}{ex:plotstream} -%Suppose you have a CSV file called "data.csv" containing the -%following: -%\begin{verbatim} -%x,y -%0,0 -%1,1 -%2,0.5 -%1.5,0.3 -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{data}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{data}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{x}{0}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{y}{0}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{data}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{x}{1}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{y}{1}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{data}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{x}{2}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{y}{0.5}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{data}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{x}{1.5}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{data}{y}{0.3}\relax -%First load the file into a database called "data": -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloaddb{data}{data.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%Now create a figure containing this data: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[tbhp] -%\centering -%\begin{tikzpicture} -%\pgfplothandlermark{\pgfuseplotmark{o}} -%\pgfplotstreamstart -%\DTLplotstream{data}{x}{y}% -%\pgfplotstreamend -%\pgfusepath{stroke} -%\end{tikzpicture} -%\caption{Adding to a Plot Stream} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:plotstream}. -% -%\begin{figure}[tbhp] -%\centering -%\begin{tikzpicture} -%\pgfplothandlermark{\pgfuseplotmark{o}} -%\pgfplotstreamstart -%\DTLplotstream{data}{x}{y}% -%\pgfplotstreamend -%\pgfusepath{stroke} -%\end{tikzpicture} -%\caption{Adding to a Plot Stream} -%\label{fig:plotstream} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\begin{example}{Plotting Multiple Keys in the Same -%Database}{ex:multikey} -%Suppose I have conducted two time to growth experiments. For each -%experiment, I have recorded the log count at set times, and I have -%recorded this information in the same data file called, say, -%"growth.csv" which contains the following: -%\begin{verbatim} -%Time,Experiment 1,Experiment 2 -%0,3.73,3.6 -%23,3.67,3.7 -%60,4.9,3.8 -%\end{verbatim} -%\DTLnewdb{growth}\DTLnewrow{growth}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Time}{0}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 1}{3.73}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 2}{3.6}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{growth}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Time}{23}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 1}{3.67}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 2}{3.7}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{growth}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Time}{60}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 1}{4.9}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{growth}{Experiment 2}{3.8}\relax -%I can load the data into a database using: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloaddb{growth}{growth.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%However, I'd like to plot both results on the same graph. Since they -%are contained in the same database, I can't use the method I used -%in \autoref{ex:2db}. Instead I can use a combination of -%\ics{DTLplot} and \ics{DTLplotstream}: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[tbhp] -%\centering -%% computer bounds -%\DTLminforkeys{growth}{Time}{\minX} -%\DTLminforkeys{growth}{Experiment 1,Experiment 2}{\minY} -%\DTLmaxforkeys{growth}{Time}{\maxX} -%\DTLmaxforkeys{growth}{Experiment 1,Experiment 2}{\maxY} -%% round x tick labels -%\setcounter{DTLplotroundXvar}{0} -%% redefine \DTLplotatbegintikz to plot the data for Experiment 1 -%\renewcommand*{\DTLplotatbegintikz}{% -%% set plot mark -%\pgfplothandlermark{\color{green}\pgfuseplotmark{x}} -%% start plot stream -%\pgfplotstreamstart -%% add data from Experiment 1 to plot stream -%\DTLplotstream{growth}{Time}{Experiment 1}% -%% end plot stream -%\pgfplotstreamend -%% stroke path -%\pgfusepath{stroke} -%% add information to legend (no line is require so use \relax) -%\DTLaddtoplotlegend{\color{green}% -%\pgfuseplotmark{x}}{\relax}{Experiment 1} -%} -%% now plot the data for Experiment 2 -%\DTLplot{growth}{x=Time,y=Experiment 2,legend, -%width=3in,height=3in,bounds={\minX,\minY,\maxX,\maxY}, -%xlabel={Time},ylabel={Log Count}, -%legendlabels={Experiment 2}} -%\caption{Time to Growth Data} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:multikey}. -%Notes: -%\begin{itemize} -%\item I redefined \ics{DTLplotatbegintikz} in order to add -%the new plot to the legend, since \ics{DTLplotatendtikz} is -%used after the legend is plotted. The $x$ and $y$ unit vectors -%are set before \ics{DTLplotatbegintikz} so I don't need to -%worry about the co-ordinates. -%\item I set the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar} to zero -%otherwise the $x$ axis would have looked too cluttered. -%\item I have used \ics{DTLminforkeys} and \ics{DTLmaxforkeys} to -%determine the bounds since \ics{DTLplot} won't take the data -%for Experiment 1 into account when computing the bounds. -%\end{itemize} -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\DTLminforkeys{growth}{Time}{\minX} -%\DTLminforkeys{growth}{Experiment 1,Experiment 2}{\minY} -%\DTLmaxforkeys{growth}{Time}{\maxX} -%\DTLmaxforkeys{growth}{Experiment 1,Experiment 2}{\maxY} -%\setcounter{DTLplotroundXvar}{0} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLplotatbegintikz}{% -%\pgfplothandlermark{\color{green}\pgfuseplotmark{x}} -%\pgfplotstreamstart -%\DTLplotstream{growth}{Time}{Experiment 1}% -%\pgfplotstreamend -%\pgfusepath{stroke} -%\DTLaddtoplotlegend{\color{green}\pgfuseplotmark{x}}{\relax}{Experiment 1} -%} -%\centering -%\DTLplot{growth}{x=Time,y=Experiment 2,legend, -%width=3in,height=3in,bounds={\minX,\minY,\maxX,\maxY}, -%xlabel={Time},ylabel={Log Count}, -%legendlabels={Experiment 2}} -%\caption{Time to Growth Data} -%\label{fig:multikey} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\section{Bar Charts (\texorpdfstring{databar}{databar} package)} -% -%The \sty{databar} package provides commands for creating bar charts. -%It is not loaded by the \sty{datatool} package, so if you want to -%use it you will need to load it explicitly using -%"\usepackage{databar}". -% -%Bar charts can either be vertical or horizontal, the default is -%vertical. In this section the $x$ axis refers to the horizontal -%axis when plotting a vertical bar chart and to the vertical axis -%when plotting a horizontal bar chart. The $x$ axis units are in -%increments of one bar. The $y$ axis refers to the vertical axis -%when plotting a vertical bar chart and to the horizontal axis when -%plotting a horizontal bar chart. The $y$ axis uses the same -%co-ordinates as the data. The bars may have an upper and lower -%label. In a vertical bar chart, the lower label is placed below -%the $x$ axis and the upper label is placed above the top of the bar. -%In a horizontal bar chart, the lower label is placed to the left of -%the $x$ axis and the upper label is placed to the right of the -%end of the bar. (This is actually a misnomer as it is possible -%for the ``upper'' label to be below the ``lower'' label if a -%bar has a negative value, however the bars are considered to -%be anchored on the $x$ axis, and the other end of the bar is -%considered to be the ``upper'' end, regardless of its -%direction.) -% -%The \sty{databar} package options are as follows: -%\begin{description} -%\item[{\pkgopt[databar]{color}}] Created coloured bar charts -%(default.) -% -%\item[{\pkgopt[databar]{gray}}] Created grey scale bar charts. -% -%\item[{\pkgopt[databar]{vertical}}] Created vertical bar charts -%(default.) -% -%\item[{\pkgopt[databar]{horizontal}}] Created horizontal bar charts. -%\end{description} -% -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarchart} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbarchart}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{settings}\marg{values} -%\end{definition} -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLmultibarchart} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{settings}\marg{values} -%\end{definition} -%These commands both create a bar chart from the information in -%the database \meta{db name}, where \meta{condition} is the same -%as the optional argument for \ics{DTLforeach} described in -%\autoref{sec:dbforeach}, and \meta{values} is the same as the -%penultimate argument of \ics{DTLforeach}. The \meta{settings} -%argument is a \meta{setting}"="\meta{value} list of settings. The -%first command, \cs{DLTbarchart}, will draw a bar chart for a -%given column of data in the database, whereas the second command, -%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}, will draw a bar chart that is divided into -%groups of bars where each bar within a group represents data from -%several columns of a given row in the database. -% -%The \setting{DTLbarchart}{variable} setting is -%required for \cs{DTLbarchart} and the -%\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{variables}, the other settings are -%optional (though some may only be used for one of -%\cs{DTLbarchart} and \cs{DLTmultibarchart}), and are as follows: -% -%\begin{description} -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart}{variable}] -%This specifies the control sequence to use that -%contains the value used to construct the bar chart. The control -%sequence must be one of the control sequences to appear in -%the assignment list \meta{values}. This setting is required -%for \cs{DTLbarchart}, and is unavailable for \cs{DTLmultibarchart}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{variables}] -%This specifies a list of control sequences to use which -%contain the values used to construct the bar chart. Each control -%sequence must be one of the control sequences to appear in -%the assignment list \meta{values}. This setting is required -%for \cs{DTLmultibarchart}, and is unavailable for -%\cs{DTLbarchart}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{max}] -%This specifies the maximum value on the $y$ axis. (This should -%be a standard decimal value.) -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{length}] -%This specifies the overall length of the $y$ axis, and must -%be a dimension. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{maxdepth}] -%This must be a zero or negative number. It specifies the maximum -%depth of the $y$ axis. (This should be a standard decimal value.) -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{axes}] -%This setting specifies which axes to display. This may take one -%of the following values: "both", "x", "y" or "none". -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{barlabel}] -%This setting specifies the lower bar label. When used with -%\cs{DTLmultibarchart} it indicates the group label. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{multibarlabels}] -%This setting should contain a comma separated list of labels -%for each bar within a group for \cs{DTLmultibarchart}. This -%setting is not available for \cs{DTLbarchart}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart}{upperbarlabel}] -%This setting specifies the upper bar label. This setting -%is not available for \cs{DTLmultibarchart}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{uppermultibarlabels}] -%This setting must be a comma separated list of upper bar -%labels for each bar within a group. This setting is not -%available for \cs{DTLbarchart}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{yticpoints}] -%This must be a comma separated list of tick locations for the -%$y$ axis. (These should be standard decimal values.) -%This setting overrides \setting{DTLbarchart}{yticgap}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{yticgap}] -%This specifies the gap between the $y$ tick marks. (This should -%be a standard decimal value.) -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{yticlabels}] -%This must be a comma separated list of tick labels for the -%$y$ axis. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{ylabel}] -%This specifies the label for the $y$ axis. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{groupgap}] This specifies -%the gap between groups when using \cs{DTLmultibarchart}. -%This value is given as a multiple of the bar width. The -%default value is 1, which indicates a gap of one bar width. -%This setting is not available for \cs{DTLbarchart}. -% -%\item[\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{verticalbars}] -%This is a boolean setting, so it can only take the values -%"true" (do a vertical bar chart) or "false" (do a horizontal -%bar chart.) If the value is omitted, "true" is assumed. -%\end{description} -% -%\begin{example}{A Basic Bar Chart}{ex:barchart} -%Recall \autoref{ex:piechart} defined a database called "fruit". -%This example will be using that database to plot a bar chart. -%The following plots a basic vertical bar chart: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theQuantity}{fruit}{\theQuantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Basic Bar Chart} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:barchart}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theQuantity}{fruit}{\theQuantity=Quantity} -%\caption{A Basic Bar Chart} -%\label{fig:barchart} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\subsection{Changing the Appearance of a Bar Chart} -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarchartlength} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbarchartlength} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies the total length of the $y$ axis. You must use -%\cs{setlength} to change this value. The default value is 3in. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarwidth} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbarwidth} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies the width of each bar. You must use \cs{setlength} -%to change this value. The default value is 1cm. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarlabeloffset} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbarlabeloffset} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies the distance from the $x$ axis to the lower bar label. -%You must use \cs{setlength} to change this value. The default value -%is 10pt. -% -%\begin{definition} -%\counterfmt{DTLbarroundvar} -%\end{definition} -%The $y$ tick labels are rounded to \meta{n} digits after the -%decimal point, where \meta{n} is given by the value of the -%counter \counterfmt{DTLbarroundvar}. You must use \cs{setcounter} -%to change this value. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLsetbarcolor} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsetbarcolor}\marg{n}\marg{color} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the \meta{n}th bar colour to \meta{color}. -%Only the first eight bars have a colour defined by default. If you -%need more than eight bars, you will need to define more bar colours. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdobarcolor} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdobarcolor}\marg{n} -%\end{definition} -%This sets the current colour to the colour of the \meta{n}th bar. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbaroutlinecolor} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbaroutlinecolor} -%\end{definition} -%This macro contains the colour of the bar outlines. This defaults -%to "black". -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbaroutlinewidth} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbaroutlinewidth} -%\end{definition} -%This length specifies the line width for the bar outlines. If it -%is 0pt, the outline is not drawn. The default value is 0pt. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbaratbegintikz} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbaratbegintikz} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies any additional commands to add to the start of -%the plot. It defaults to nothing, and is called after the -%unit vectors are set. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbaratendtikz} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbaratendtikz} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies any additional commands to add to the end of -%the plot. It defaults to nothing. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\ifDTLverticalbars} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{ifDTLverticalbars} -%\end{definition} -%This conditional governs whether the chart uses vertical or -%horizontal bars. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarXlabelalign} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbarXlabelalign} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies the text alignment of the lower bar labels. This -%defaults to "left,rotate=-90" if you use the \pkgopt[databar]{vertical} -%package option or the \setting{DTLbarchart}{verticalbars} setting, -%and defaults to "right" if you use the \pkgopt[databar]{horizontal} -%package option or the \setting{DTLbarchart}{verticalbars}"=false" -%setting. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarYticklabelalign} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbarYlabelalign} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies the text alignment of the $y$ axis labels. This -%defaults to "right" for vertical bar charts and "center" for -%horizontal bar charts. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbardisplayYticklabel}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies how to display the $y$ tick label. The argument -%is the tick label. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies how to display the lower bar label for -%\cs{DTLbarchart} and the lower bar group label for -%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}. The argument is the label. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies how to display the lower bar label for -%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}. The argument is the label. This -%command is ignored by \cs{DTLbarchart}. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplayupperbarlabel} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdisplayupperbarlabel}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies how to display the upper bar label for -%\cs{DTLbarchart} and the upper bar group label for -%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}. The argument is the label. -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -%This specifies how to display the upper bar label for -%\cs{DTLmultibarchart}. The argument is the label. This -%command is ignored by \cs{DTLbarchart}. -% -%\begin{example}{An Labelled Bar Chart}{ex:annotebarchart} -%This example extends \autoref{ex:barchart} so that the chart is -%a bit more informative (which is after all the whole point of -%a chart.) This chart now has a label below each bar, as well -%as a label above the bar. The lower label uses the value of the -%"Name" key, and the upper label uses the quantity. I have also -%set the outline width so each bar has a border. -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\setlength{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}{1pt} -%\centering -%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theQuantity,barlabel=\theName,% -%upperbarlabel=\theQuantity}{fruit}{% -%\theQuantity=Quantity,\theName=Name} -%\caption{A Basic Bar Chart} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:annotebarchart}. -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\setlength{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}{1pt} -%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theQuantity,barlabel=\theName, -%upperbarlabel=\theQuantity}{fruit}{% -%\theQuantity=Quantity,\theName=Name} -%\caption{A Bar Chart} -%\label{fig:annotebarchart} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -%\begin{example}{Profit/Loss Bar Chart}{ex:profit} -%Suppose I have a file called "profits.csv" that looks like: -%\DTLnewdb{profits} -%\DTLnewrow{profits} -%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Year}{2000}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Profit}{\protect\pounds2,525}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{profits} -%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Year}{2001}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Profit}{\protect\pounds3,752}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{profits} -%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Year}{2002}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Profit}{-\protect\pounds1,520}\relax -%\DTLnewrow{profits} -%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Year}{2003}\relax -%\DTLnewdbentry{profits}{Profit}{\protect\pounds1,270}\relax -%\begin{verbatim} -%Year,Profit -%2000,\pounds2,535 -%2001,\pounds3,752 -%2002,-\pounds1,520 -%2003,\pounds1,270 -%\end{verbatim} -%First I can load this file into a database called "profits": -%\begin{verbatim} -%\DTLloaddb{profits}{profits.csv} -%\end{verbatim} -%Now I can plot the data as a bar chart: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%% Set the width of each bar to 10pt -%\setlength{\DTLbarwidth}{10pt} -%% Set the outline width to 1pt -%\setlength{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}{1pt} -%% Round the $y$ tick labels to integers -%\setcounter{DTLbarroundvar}{0} -%% Adjust the tick label offset -%\setlength{\DTLticklabeloffset}{20pt} -%% Change the y tick label alignment -%\renewcommand*{\DTLbarYticklabelalign}{left} -%% Rotate the y tick labels -%\renewcommand*{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel}[1]{\rotatebox{-45}{#1}} -%% Set the bar colours depending on the value of \theProfit -%\DTLforeach{profits}{\theProfit=Profit}{% -%\ifthenelse{\DTLislt{\theProfit}{0}} -%{\DTLsetbarcolor{\DTLcurrentindex}{red}} -%{\DTLsetbarcolor{\DTLcurrentindex}{blue}}} -%% Do the bar chart -%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theProfit,upperbarlabel=\theYear, -%ylabel={Profit/Loss (\pounds)},verticalbars=false, -%maxdepth=-2000,max=4000}{profits} -%{\theProfit=Profit,\theYear=Year} -%\caption{Profits for 2000--2003} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:profits}. Notes: -%\begin{enumerate} -%\item This example uses \cs{rotatebox}, so the \sty{graphics} -%or \sty{graphicx} package is required. -%\item The $y$ tick labels are too wide to fit horizontally -%so they have been rotated to avoid overlapping with their -%neighbour. -%\item Rotating the $y$ tick labels puts them too close to -%the $y$ axis, so \ics{DTLticklabeloffset} is made larger to -%compensate. -%\item Remember not to use \cs{year} as an assignment command -%as this command already exists! -%\item Before the bar chart is created I have iterated through -%the database, setting the bar colour to red or blue -%depending on the value of \cs{theProfit}. -%\end{enumerate} -% -%Both \cs{DTLbarchart} and \cs{DTLmultibarchart} set the following -%macros, which may be used in \cs{DTLbaratbegintikz} and -%\cs{DTLbaratendtikz}: -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarchartwidth} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbarchartwidth} -%\end{definition} -%This is the overall width of the bar chart. In the case of -%\cs{DTLbarchart} this is just the number of bars. In the case -%of \cs{DTLmultibarchart} it is computed as: -%\begin{displaymath} -%m \times n + (m-1)\times g -%\end{displaymath} -%where $m$ is the number of bar groups (i.e.\ the number of rows -%of data), $n$ is the number of bars within a group (i.e.\ -%the number of commands listed in the -%\setting{DTLmultibarchart}{variables}) setting and $g$ is the -%group gap (as specified by the \setting{DTLmultibarchart}{groupgap} setting.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLnegextent} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLnegextent} -%\end{definition} -%This is set to the negative extent of the bar chart. (This value -%may either be zero or negative, and corresponds to the -%\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{maxdepth} setting.) -% -%\DescribeMacro{\DTLbarmax} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLbarmax} -%\end{definition} -%This is set to the maximum extent of the bar chart. (This value -%corresponds to the -%\setting{DTLbarchart,DTLmultibarchart}{max} setting.) -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\setlength{\DTLbarwidth}{10pt} -%\setlength{\DTLbaroutlinewidth}{1pt} -%\setlength{\DTLticklabeloffset}{20pt} -%\setcounter{DTLbarroundvar}{0} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLbarYticklabelalign}{left} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel}[1]{\rotatebox{-45}{#1}} -%\DTLforeach{profits}{\theProfit=Profit}{\relax -%\ifthenelse{\DTLislt{\theProfit}{0}} -%{\DTLsetbarcolor{\DTLcurrentindex}{red}} -%{\DTLsetbarcolor{\DTLcurrentindex}{blue}}} -%\DTLbarchart{variable=\theProfit,upperbarlabel=\theYear, -%ylabel={Profit/Loss (\pounds)},verticalbars=false, -%maxdepth=-2000,max=4000 -%}{profits} -%{\theProfit=Profit,\theYear=Year} -%\caption{Profits for 2000--2003} -%\label{fig:profits} -%\end{figure} -% -%\end{example} -% -%\begin{example}{A Multi-Bar Chart}{ex:multibar} -%This example uses the "marks" database described in -%\autoref{ex:editdb}. -%Recall that this database stores student marks for three -%assignments. The keys for the assignment marks are -%\texttt{Assignment 1}, \texttt{Assignment 2} and -%\texttt{Assignment 3}, respectively. I can convert this -%data into a bar chart using the following: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLmultibarchart{variables={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}, -%barwidth=10pt,uppermultibarlabels={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}, -%barlabel={\firstname\ \surname}}{marks}{% -%\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\assignI=Assignment 1,% -%\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3} -%\caption{Student Marks} -%\end{figure} -%\end{verbatim} -%This produces \autoref{fig:multibar}. Notes: -%\begin{enumerate} -%\item I used "variables={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}" to -%set the variable to use for each bar within a group. This means -%that there will be three bars in each group. -%\item I have set the bar width to 10pt, otherwise the chart -%will be too wide. -%\item I used "uppermultibarlabels={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}" -%to set the upper labels for each bar within a group. This -%will print the assignment mark above the relevant bar. -%\item I used "barlabel={\firstname\ \surname}" to place the -%student's name below the group corresponding to that student. -%\end{enumerate} -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLmultibarchart{variables={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}, -%barwidth=10pt,uppermultibarlabels={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}, -%barlabel={\firstname\ \surname}}{marks} -%{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3} -%\caption{Student Marks}\label{fig:multibar} -%\end{figure} -% -%Recall that \autoref{ex:editdb} computed the average score over -%for each student, and saved it with the key "Average". This -%information can be added to the bar chart. It might also be -%useful to compute the average over all students and add this -%information to the chart. This is done as follows: -%\begin{verbatim} -%\end{verbatim} -%which produces \autoref{fig:multibarmean}. Notes: -%\begin{enumerate} -%\item I've used the TikZ snake library to create a brace, so -%I need to put -%\begin{verbatim} -%\usetikzlibrary{snakes} -%\end{verbatim} -%in the preamble. See the \sty{pgf} manual for more details on -%how to use this library. -% -%\item I used \ics{DTLbargroupwidth} to indicate the width of -%each bar group. -% -%\item I used \ics{DTLbarchartwidth} to indicate the width of the -%entire bar chart -%\end{enumerate} -% -%\begin{figure}[htbp] -%\centering -%\DTLmeanforkeys{marks}{Average}{\overallmean} -%\DTLround{\overallmean}{\overallmean}{2} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLbaratendtikz}{\draw[lightgray,loosely dotted] (0,\overallmean) -- -%(\DTLbarchartwidth,\overallmean) node[right,black]{Average (\overallmean)};} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel}[1]{\relax -%\tikz[baseline=(current bounding box.center)]{ -%\draw[snake=brace,rotate=-90](0,0) -- (\DTLbargroupwidth,0);} -%\DTLround{\theMean}{\theMean}{2}\relax -%\shortstack{#1\\(Average: \theMean)}} -%\DTLmultibarchart{variables={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}, -%barwidth=10pt,uppermultibarlabels={\assignI,\assignII,\assignIII}, -%barlabel={\firstname\ \surname}}{marks} -%{\surname=Surname,\firstname=FirstName,\assignI=Assignment 1,\assignII=Assignment 2,\assignIII=Assignment 3,\theMean=Average} -%\caption{Student Marks (with average scores)} -%\label{fig:multibarmean} -%\end{figure} -%\end{example} -% -% \StopEventually{\clearpage\phantomsection -%\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex} -% -% -% -%\section{datatool.sty} -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*datatool.sty> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -%\subsection{Package Declaration} -% \begin{macrocode} -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{datatool}[2007/07/23 v1.0 (NLCT)] -% \end{macrocode} -% Load required packages: -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{xkeyval} -\RequirePackage{ifthen} -\RequirePackage{xfor} -\RequirePackage{fp} -\RequirePackage{substr} -% \end{macrocode} -% -%\subsection{Package Options} -% Define macro to store data separator character (comma by default) -% This is the separator used in external data files, not in the -% \LaTeX\ code, which always uses a comma separator. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@separator} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@separator}{,} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide a command for setting the data separator. This sets -% \cs{@dtl@separator}, and constructs the relevent macros that -% require this character to be hardcoded into their definition. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetseparator} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsetseparator}[1]{% -\renewcommand*{\@dtl@separator}{#1}% -\@dtl@construct@lopoffs -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Make it easier to set a tab separator -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsettabseparator} -\begingroup -\catcode`\ 12 -\gdef\DTLsettabseparator{% - \catcode`\ 12 - \DTLsetseparator{ }% -} -\endgroup -%\end{macro} -% -% Define a macro to store data delimiter character (double quote -% by default.) This is used in external data files, not in the -% \LaTeX\ code. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@delimiter} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup -\catcode`\"12\relax -\gdef\@dtl@delimiter{"} -\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define a macro that sets the delimiter. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetdelimiter} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*\DTLsetdelimiter[1]{% -\renewcommand*{\@dtl@delimiter}{#1}% -\@dtl@construct@lopoffs} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% \cs{@dtl@construct@lopoff}\meta{separator char}\meta{delimiter char} -% defines -% \cs{@dtl@lopoff}\meta{first element}\meta{sep}\meta{rest of list}\cs{to}\meta{cmd1}\meta{cmd2} -% for the current separator and delimiter. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@lopoff} -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\@dtl@construct@lopoff#1#2{% -\noexpand\long\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@lopoff#1##1##2\noexpand -\to##3##4{% -\noexpand\ifx#2##1\noexpand\relax -\noexpand\@dtl@qlopoff#1##1##2\noexpand\to##3##4\relax -\noexpand\else -\noexpand\@dtl@lop@ff#1##1##2\noexpand\to##3##4\relax -\noexpand\fi -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define command to construct macro \cs{@dtl@qlopoff} to be used -% when the entry is surrounded by the current delimiter value. -% Syntax: -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{@dtl@construct@qlopoff}\meta{separator char}\meta{delimiter char} -%\end{definition} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@qlopoff} -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\@dtl@construct@qlopoff#1#2{% -\noexpand\long\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@qlopoff#1#2##1#2#1##2\noexpand -\to##3##4{% -\noexpand\def##4{##1}\noexpand\def##3{#1##2}% -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define command to construct macro \cs{@dtl@lop@ff} to be used when -% the entry isn't surrouded by the delimiter. -%Syntax: -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{@dtl@construct@lop@ff}\meta{separator char} -%\end{definition} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@lop@ff} -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\@dtl@construct@lop@ff#1{% -\noexpand\long\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@lop@ff#1##1#1##2\noexpand -\to##3##4{% -\noexpand\def##4{##1}\noexpand\def##3{#1##2}% -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Construct all the lopoff macros. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@lopoffs} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\@dtl@construct@lopoffs}{% -\edef\@dtl@chars{{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@delimiter}}% -\expandafter\@dtl@construct@lopoff\@dtl@chars -\expandafter\@dtl@construct@qlopoff\@dtl@chars -\expandafter\@dtl@construct@lop@ff\expandafter{\@dtl@separator}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define the decimal character -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimal} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@decimal}{.} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%Define the number group character -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@numbergroupchar} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@numbergroupchar}{,} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsetnumberchars}\marg{number group char}\marg{decimal char} -%\end{definition} -% Sets the decimal character and number group -% characters. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetnumberchars} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsetnumberchars}[2]{% -\renewcommand*{\@dtl@numbergroupchar}{#1}% -\renewcommand*{\@dtl@decimal}{#2}% -\@dtl@construct@getnums -\@dtl@construct@stripnumgrpchar{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Construct macros for extracting integer and -% fractional parts from a real number using the decimal character -% given by "#1". -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLconverttodecimal}\marg{num}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% \cs{DTLconverttodecimal} will convert locale dependent \meta{num} -% a decimal number in a form that can be used in the -% macros defined in the \sty{fp} package. The resulting -% number is stored in \meta{cmd}. This command has to be redefined -% whenever the decimal and number group characters are changed -% as they form part of the command definitions. -% -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@getintfrac} -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\@dtl@construct@getintfrac#1{% -\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@getintfrac##1#1##2\noexpand\relax{% -\noexpand\@dtl@get@intpart{##1}% -\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart{##2}% -\noexpand\ifx\noexpand\@empty\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart - \noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart{0}% -\noexpand\else - \noexpand\@dtl@getfracpart##2\noexpand\relax - \noexpand\@dtl@choptrailingzeroes{\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart}% -\noexpand\fi -}% -\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@getfracpart##1#1\noexpand\relax{% -\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart{##1}% -}% -\noexpand\def\noexpand\DTLconverttodecimal##1##2{% -\noexpand\dtl@ifsingle{##1}% -{\noexpand\expandafter\noexpand\toks@\noexpand\expandafter{##1}% -\noexpand\edef\noexpand\@dtl@tmp{\noexpand\the\noexpand\toks@}}% -{\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@tmp{##1}}% - \noexpand\@dtl@standardize@currency\noexpand\@dtl@tmp - \noexpand\ifx\noexpand\@dtl@org@currency\noexpand\@empty - \noexpand\else - \noexpand\let\noexpand\@dtl@currency\noexpand\@dtl@org@currency - \noexpand\fi -\noexpand\expandafter -\noexpand\@dtl@getintfrac\noexpand\@dtl@tmp#1\noexpand\relax -\noexpand\edef##2{\noexpand\@dtl@intpart.\noexpand\@dtl@fracpart}}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define command to call the above with the relevant decimal -% character: -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@getnums} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@construct@getnums}{% -\expandafter\@dtl@construct@getintfrac\expandafter{\@dtl@decimal}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Get the integer (adjusting for repeating +/- signs if neccessary) -% Sets \cs{@dtl@intpart}. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@get@intpart} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@get@intpart}[1]{% -\@dtl@tmpcount=1\relax -\def\@dtl@intpart{#1}% -\ifx\@dtl@intpart\@empty - \def\@dtl@intpart{0}% -\else - \def\@dtl@intpart{}% - \@dtl@get@int@part#1.\relax% -\fi -\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcount<0\relax - \edef\@dtl@intpart{-\@dtl@intpart}% -\fi -\@dtl@strip@numgrpchar{\@dtl@intpart}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@get@int@part} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@get@int@part#1#2\relax{% -\def\@dtl@argi{#1}% -\def\@dtl@argii{#2}% -\ifx\protect#1\relax% - \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@int@part -\else - \expandafter\ifx\@dtl@argi\$% - \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@int@part - \else - \ifx-#1% - \multiply\@dtl@tmpcount by -1\relax - \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@int@part - \else - \if\@dtl@argi+% - \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@int@part - \else - \def\@dtl@intpart{#1}% - \ifx.\@dtl@argii - \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@gobble - \else - \let\@dtl@get@nextintpart=\@dtl@get@next@intpart - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi -\fi -\@dtl@get@nextintpart#2\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@get@next@intpart} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@get@next@intpart#1.\relax{% -\edef\@dtl@intpart{\@dtl@intpart#1}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{@dtl@choptrailingzeroes}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Chop trailing zeroes from number given by \meta{cmd}. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@choptrailingzeroes} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@choptrailingzeroes}[1]{% -\def\@dtl@tmpcpz{}% -\expandafter\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroes#1\@nil% -\let#1=\@dtl@tmpcpz -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Trailing zeroes are chopped using a recursive algorithm. -% \cs{@dtl@tmpcpz} needs to be set before using this. (The chopped -% number is put in this control sequence.) -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroes} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroes#1#2\@nil{% -\FPifeq{#2}{0}% - \edef\@dtl@tmpcpz{\@dtl@tmpcpz#1}% - \let\@dtl@chopzeroesnext=\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroesnoop -\else - \edef\@dtl@tmpcpz{\@dtl@tmpcpz#1}% - \let\@dtl@chopzeroesnext=\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroes -\fi -\@dtl@chopzeroesnext#2\@nil -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% No-op macro to end recursion -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroesnoop} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@chop@trailingzeroesnoop#1\@nil{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@truncatedecimal}\meta{cmd} -%\end{definition} -%Truncates decimal given by \meta{cmd} to an integer (assumes in -% decimal format with full stop as decimal point) -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@truncatedecimal} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@truncatedecimal}[1]{% -\expandafter\@dtl@truncatedecimal#1.\@nil#1} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@truncatedecimal} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@truncatedecimal#1.#2\@nil#3{% -\def#3{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{@dtl@strip@numgrpchar}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Strip the number group character from the number given by -% \meta{cmd}. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@strip@numgrpchar} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@strip@numgrpchar}[1]{% -\def\@dtl@stripped{}% -\edef\@dtl@do@stripnumgrpchar{% -\noexpand\@@dtl@strip@numgrpchar#1\@dtl@numbergroupchar -\noexpand\relax}% -\@dtl@do@stripnumgrpchar -\let#1=\@dtl@stripped -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define command to construct macro \cs{@@dtl@strip@numgrpchar} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@construct@stripnumgrpchar} -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\@dtl@construct@stripnumgrpchar#1{% -\noexpand\def\noexpand\@@dtl@strip@numgrpchar##1#1##2\noexpand\relax{% -\noexpand\expandafter\noexpand\toks@\noexpand\expandafter -{\noexpand\@dtl@stripped}% -\noexpand\edef\noexpand\@dtl@stripped{\noexpand\the\noexpand\toks@ -##1}% -\noexpand\def\noexpand\@dtl@tmp{##2}% -\noexpand\ifx\noexpand\@dtl@tmp\noexpand\@empty - \noexpand\let\noexpand\@dtl@next=\noexpand\relax -\noexpand\else - \noexpand\let\noexpand\@dtl@next=\noexpand\@@dtl@strip@numgrpchar -\noexpand\fi -\noexpand\@dtl@next##2\noexpand\relax -}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLdecimaltolocale}\marg{number}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Define command to convert a decimal number into the locale -% dependent format. Stores result in \meta{cmd} which must be -% a control sequence. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdecimaltolocale} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdecimaltolocale}[2]{% -\edef\@dtl@tmpdtl{#1}% -\expandafter\@dtl@decimaltolocale\@dtl@tmpdtl.\relax -\FPifeq{\@dtl@fracpart}{0}% - \edef#2{\@dtl@intpart}% -\else - \edef#2{\@dtl@intpart\@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Convert the integer part (store in \cs{@dtl@intpart}) -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimaltolocale} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@decimaltolocale#1.#2\relax{% -\@dtl@decimaltolocaleint{#1}% -\def\@dtl@fracpart{#2}% -\ifx\@dtl@fracpart\@empty - \def\@dtl@fracpart{0}% -\else - \@dtl@decimaltolocalefrac#2\relax -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimaltolocaleint} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@decimaltolocaleint#1{% -\@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax -\@dtl@countdigits#1.\relax -\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=\@dtl@tmpcount\relax -\divide\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 3\relax -\multiply\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 3\relax -\advance\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by -\@dtl@tmpcount\relax -\ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount<0\relax - \advance\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 3\relax -\fi -\def\@dtl@intpart{}% -\@dtl@decimal@to@localeint#1.\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Counts the number of digits until "#2" is a full stop. -% (increments \cs{@dtl@tmpcount}.) -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@countdigits} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@countdigits#1#2\relax{% -\advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax -\ifx.#2\relax - \let\@dtl@countnext=\@gobble -\else - \let\@dtl@countnext=\@dtl@countdigits -\fi -\@dtl@countnext#2\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimal@to@localeint} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@decimal@to@localeint#1#2\relax{% -\advance\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 1\relax -\ifx.#2\relax - \edef\@dtl@intpart{\@dtl@intpart#1}% - \let\@dtl@localeintnext=\@gobble -\else - \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=3\relax - \edef\@dtl@intpart{\@dtl@intpart#1\@dtl@numbergroupchar}% - \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=0\relax - \else - \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount>3\relax - \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=0\relax - \fi - \edef\@dtl@intpart{\@dtl@intpart#1}% - \fi - \let\@dtl@localeintnext=\@dtl@decimal@to@localeint -\fi -\@dtl@localeintnext#2\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Convert the fractional part (store in \cs{@dtl@fracpart}) -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@decimaltolocalefrac} -% \begin{macrocode} -% \end{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@decimaltolocalefrac#1.\relax{% -\def\@dtl@fracpart{#1}% -\@dtl@choptrailingzeroes{\@dtl@fracpart}% -} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency}\marg{number}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Define command to convert a decimal number into the locale -% dependent currency format. Stores result in \meta{cmd} which must be -% a control sequence. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdecimaltocurrency} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdecimaltocurrency}[2]{% -\edef\@dtl@tmpdtl{#1}% -\expandafter\@dtl@decimaltolocale\@dtl@tmpdtl.\relax -\dtl@truncatedecimal\@dtl@tmpdtl -\@dtl@tmpcount=\@dtl@tmpdtl\relax -\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@currency}% -\FPifeq{\@dtl@fracpart}{0}% - \ifnum\@dtl@tmpcount<0\relax - \@dtl@tmpcount = -\@dtl@tmpcount\relax - \edef#2{-\the\@dtl@toks\the\@dtl@tmpcount\@dtl@decimal00}% - \else - \edef#2{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@intpart\@dtl@decimal00}% - \fi -\else - \ifnum\@dtl@tmpcount<0\relax - \@dtl@tmpcount = -\@dtl@tmpcount\relax - \ifnum\@dtl@fracpart<10\relax - \edef#2{-\the\@dtl@toks\number\@dtl@tmpcount - \@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart0}% - \else - \edef#2{-\the\@dtl@toks\number\@dtl@tmpcount - \@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart}% - \fi - \else - \ifnum\@dtl@fracpart<10\relax - \edef#2{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@intpart\@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart0}% - \else - \edef#2{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@intpart\@dtl@decimal\@dtl@fracpart}% - \fi - \fi -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Set the defaults: -% \begin{macrocode} -\@dtl@construct@lopoffs -\@dtl@construct@getnums -\expandafter\@dtl@construct@stripnumgrpchar\expandafter -{\@dtl@numbergroupchar} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define key for package option \pkgopt{separator}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datatool.sty}{separator}{% -\DTLsetseparator{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define key for package option \pkgopt{delimiter}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datatool.sty}{delimiter}{% -\DTLsetdelimiter{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define key for package option \pkgopt{verbose}. (This also -% switches the \sty{fp} messages on/off) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{datatool.sty}[dtl]{verbose}[true]{% -\ifdtlverbose \FPmessagestrue\else \FPmessagesfalse\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% Display message only if verbose option set: -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@message}[1]{% -\ifdtlverbose \typeout{#1}\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% Process package options: -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProcessOptionsX -% \end{macrocode} -% Requires \texttt{compare.tex}, unless \cs{compare} has already -% been defined. If paragraph breaks are allowed, these commands -% need to be defined to be long. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{compare}{\input{compare}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Many of the commands used by this package are short commands -% (such as \cs{compare}.) This means that you can't use \cs{par} -% in the data. To get around this, define the robust command -% \cs{DTLpar} to use instead. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLpar} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand\DTLpar{\@par} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Determining Data Types} -% The control sequence \cs{@dtl@checknumerical} checks the data -% type of its argument, and sets \cs{@dtl@datatype} to 0 if -% the argument is a string, 1 if the argument is an integer -% or 2 if the argument is a real number. First define -% \cs{@dtl@datatype}: -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@datatype} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\@dtl@datatype -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define temporary count register -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@tmpcount} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\@dtl@tmpcount -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define count register to count the digits between the number -% group separator. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@numgrpsepcount} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\@dtl@numgrpsepcount -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define a macro that checks if the argument is numerical -% (includes decimal numbers, but not scientific notation.) -% Sets \cs{@dtl@datatype}, as described above. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@checknumerical} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\@dtl@checknumerical}[1]{% -\@dtl@numgrpsepfalse -\def\@dtl@tmp{#1}% -\ifx\@empty#1\@empty - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax -\else - \dtl@ifsingle{#1}% - {\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}% - \edef\@dtl@tmp{\the\toks@}}% - {\def\@dtl@tmp{#1}}% - \@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=2\relax - \@dtl@standardize@currency\@dtl@tmp - \ifx\@dtl@org@currency\@empty - \else - \let\@dtl@currency\@dtl@org@currency - \fi - \expandafter\@dtl@checknumericalstart\@dtl@tmp\@nil\@nil -\fi -\ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount>-1\relax - \if@dtl@numgrpsep - \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=3\relax - \else - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \fi - \fi -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Check first character for checknumerical process to see if -% it's a plus or minus sign. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@checknumericalstart} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@checknumericalstart#1#2\@nil\@nil{% -\ifx#1\protect - \@dtl@checknumericalstart#2\@nil\@nil\relax -\else - \if-#1\relax - \def\@dtl@tmp{#2}% - \ifx\@empty\@dtl@tmp - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \else - \ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \@dtl@datatype=1\relax - \fi - \@dtl@checknumericalstart#2\@nil\@nil\relax - \fi - \else - \if+#1\relax - \def\@dtl@tmp{#2}% - \ifx\@empty\@dtl@tmp - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \else - \ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \@dtl@datatype=1\relax - \fi - \@dtl@checknumericalstart#2\@nil\@nil\relax - \fi - \else - \def\@dtl@tmp{#1}% - \ifx#1\$\relax - \@dtl@datatype=3\relax - \@dtl@checknumericalstart#2\@nil\@nil\relax - \else - \ifx\@empty\@dtl@tmp - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \else - \ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \@dtl@datatype=1\relax - \fi - \@dtl@checknumericalloop#1#2\@nil\@nil\relax - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The conditional \cs{if@dtl@numgrpsep} is set the first time -% \cs{@dtl@checknumericalloop} encounters the number group -% separator. -%\begin{macro}{\if@dtl@numgrpsep} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@dtl@numgrpsep -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Check numerical loop. This iterates through each character -% until \cs{@nil} is reached, or invalid character found. -% Increments \cs{@dtl@tmpcount} each time it encounters a -% decimal character. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@checknumericalloop} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@checknumericalloop#1#2\@nil{% -\def\@dtl@tmp{#1}% -\ifx\@nnil\@dtl@tmp\relax - \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop% -\else - \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{0}\or - \equal{#1}{1}\or - \equal{#1}{2}\or - \equal{#1}{3}\or - \equal{#1}{4}\or - \equal{#1}{5}\or - \equal{#1}{6}\or - \equal{#1}{7}\or - \equal{#1}{8}\or - \equal{#1}{9}\or - \equal{#1}{\@dtl@decimal}}{% - \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalloop% - \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{\@dtl@decimal}}{% - \if@dtl@numgrpsep - \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=3\relax - \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=-1\relax - \else - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop - \fi - \else - \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=-1\relax - \fi - }{% - \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount=-1\relax - \else - \advance\@dtl@numgrpsepcount by 1\relax - \fi}% -}{\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{\@dtl@numbergroupchar}}{% - \@dtl@numgrpseptrue - \ifnum\@dtl@numgrpsepcount<3\relax - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop - \else - \@dtl@numgrpsepcount=0\relax - \fi}{% - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop -}}% - \ifx\@dtl@decimal\@dtl@tmp\relax - \ifnum\@dtl@datatype<3\relax - \@dtl@datatype=2\relax - \fi - \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax - \ifnum\@dtl@tmpcount>1\relax - \@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \let\@dtl@chcknumnext=\@dtl@checknumericalnoop% - \fi - \fi -\fi -\@dtl@chcknumnext#2\@nil -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% End loop -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@checknumericalnoop} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@checknumericalnoop#1\@nil#2{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define \cs{DTLifnumerical} which tests the first argument, if -% its numerical do second argument, otherwise do third argument. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumerical} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLifnumerical}[3]{% -\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}% -\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax#3\else#2\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define \cs{DTLifreal} which tests the first argument, if -% it's a real number (not an integer) do second argument, -% otherwise do third argument. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifreal} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLifreal}[3]{% -\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}% -\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=2\relax #2\else #3\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define \cs{DTLifint} which tests the first argument, if -% it's an integer do second argument, -% otherwise do third argument. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifint} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLifint}[3]{% -\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}% -\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=1\relax #2\else #3\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define \cs{DTLifstring} which tests the first argument, if -% it's a string do second argument, -% otherwise do third argument. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstring} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLifstring}[3]{% -\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}% -\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax #2\else #3\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define \cs{DTLifcurrency} which tests the first argument, if -% it starts with the currency symbol do second argument, -% otherwise do third argument. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifcurrency} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLifcurrency}[3]{% -\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}% -\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=3\relax #2\else #3\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define \cs{DTLifcurrencyunit} which tests if the first argument -% is currency, and uses the currency unit given by the -% second argument. If true do third argument, otherwise -% do fourth argument. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifcurrencyunit} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifcurrencyunit}[4]{% -\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}% -\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=3\relax - \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@org@currency}{#2}}{#3}{#4}% -\else - #4% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define \cs{DTLifcasedatatype} which tests the first argument. -% If it is a string, do second argument, if it is an integer -% do third argument, if it is a real number, do fourth argument, -% if it is currency, do fifth argument. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifcasedatatype} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLifcasedatatype}[5]{% -\@dtl@checknumerical{#1}% -\ifcase\@dtl@datatype - #2% string -\or - #3% integer -\or - #4% number -\or - #5% currency -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Test if both arguments are numerical. This sets -% the conditional \cs{if@dtl@condition} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testbothnumerical} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testbothnumerical}[2]{% -\dtl@ifsingle{#1}{% - \edef\@dtl@tmp{#1}}{% - \def\@dtl@tmp{#1}}% -\expandafter\@dtl@checknumerical\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}% -\edef\@dtl@firsttype{\number\@dtl@datatype}% -\dtl@ifsingle{#2}{% - \edef\@dtl@tmp{#2}}{% - \def\@dtl@tmp{#2}}% -\expandafter\@dtl@checknumerical\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}% -\multiply\@dtl@datatype by \@dtl@firsttype\relax -\ifnum\@dtl@datatype>0\relax - \@dtl@conditiontrue -\else - \@dtl@conditionfalse -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumlt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Determine if \marg{num1} < \marg{num2}. Both numbers -% need to have the decimal separator changed to a dot -% to ensure that it works with \cs{FPiflt} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumlt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifnumlt}[4]{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}% - \DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}% - \FPiflt{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% - #3% - \else - #4% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringlt}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% String comparison -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringlt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifstringlt}[4]{% -\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}% - \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp<0\relax - #3% - \else - #4% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLiflt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Do \cs{DTLifnumlt} if both \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are -% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringlt}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLiflt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLiflt}[4]{% -\dtl@testbothnumerical{#1}{#2}% -\if@dtl@condition - \DTLifnumlt{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% -\else - \DTLifstringlt{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumgt}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Determine if \marg{num1} > \marg{num2}. Both numbers -% need to have the decimal separator changed to a dot -% to ensure that it works with \cs{FPifgt} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumgt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifnumgt}[4]{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}% - \DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}% - \FPifgt{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% - #3% - \else - #4% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringgt}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% String comparison -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringgt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifstringgt}[4]{% -\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}% - \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp>0\relax - #3% - \else - #4% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifgt}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Do \cs{DTLifnumgt} if both \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are -% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringgt}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifgt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifgt}[4]{% -\dtl@testbothnumerical{#1}{#2}% -\if@dtl@condition - \DTLifnumgt{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% -\else - \DTLifstringgt{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumeq}\marg{num1}\marg{num2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Determine if \marg{num1} = \marg{num2}. Both numbers -% need to have the decimal separator changed to a dot -% to ensure that it works with \cs{FPifeq} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumeq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifnumeq}[4]{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}% - \DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}% - \FPifeq{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% - #3% - \else - #4% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringeq}\marg{string1}\marg{string2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% String comparison -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringeq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifstringeq}[4]{% -\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}% - \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp=0\relax - #3% - \else - #4% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifeq}\marg{arg1}\marg{arg2}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Do \cs{DTLifnumeq} if both \meta{arg1} and \meta{arg2} are -% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringeq}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifeq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifeq}[4]{% -\dtl@testbothnumerical{#1}{#2}% -\if@dtl@condition - \DTLifnumeq{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% -\else - \DTLifstringeq{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Determine if \meta{min} $\leq$ \meta{num} $\leq$ \meta{max}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumclosedbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifnumclosedbetween}[5]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numiii}% -\DTLifFPclosedbetween{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}{\@dtl@numiii}{#4}{#5}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringclosedbetween}\marg{string}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% String comparison -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringclosedbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifstringclosedbetween}[5]{% -\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}% -\let\@dtl@dovalue\relax -\expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp<0\relax - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}% -\fi -\ifx\@dtl@dovalue\relax - \protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#3}}% - \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp>0\relax - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}% - \else - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#4}% - \fi -\fi -\@dtl@dovalue -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifclosedbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Do \cs{DTLifnumclosedbetween} if \marg{arg}, \meta{min} and \meta{max} are -% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringclosedbetween}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifclosedbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifclosedbetween}[5]{% -\dtl@testbothnumerical{#2}{#3}% -\if@dtl@condition - \dtl@ifsingle{#1}{% - \edef\@dtl@tmp{#1}}{% - \def\@dtl@tmp{#1}}% - \expandafter\@dtl@checknumerical\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}% - \ifnum\@dtl@datatype>0\relax - \DTLifnumclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \else - \DTLifstringclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \fi -\else - \DTLifstringclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifnumopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Determine if \meta{min} $<$ \meta{num} $<$ \meta{max}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifnumopenbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifnumopenbetween}[5]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#1}{\@dtl@numi}% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numii}% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numiii}% -\DTLifFPopenbetween{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}{\@dtl@numiii}{#4}{#5}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifstringopenbetween}\marg{string}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% String comparison -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifstringopenbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifstringopenbetween}[5]{% -\protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#2}}% -\let\@dtl@dovalue\relax -\expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp>0\relax -\else - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}% -\fi -\ifx\@dtl@dovalue\relax - \protected@edef\@dtl@tmpcmp{\noexpand\compare{#1}{#3}}% - \expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmpcmp<0\relax - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#4}% - \else - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}% - \fi -\fi -\@dtl@dovalue -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifopenbetween}\marg{arg}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Do \cs{DTLifnumopenbetween} if \marg{arg}, \meta{min} and \meta{max} are -% numerical, otherwise do \cs{DTifstringopenbetween}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifopenbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifopenbetween}[5]{% -\dtl@testbothnumerical{#2}{#3}% -\if@dtl@condition - \dtl@ifsingle{#1}{% - \edef\@dtl@tmp{#1}}{% - \def\@dtl@tmp{#1}}% - \expandafter\@dtl@checknumerical\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}% - \ifnum\@dtl@datatype>0\relax - \DTLifnumopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \else - \DTLifstringopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \fi -\else - \DTLifstringopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifFPopenbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Determine if \meta{min} $<$ \meta{num} $<$ \meta{max} where -% all arguments are in standard fixed point notation. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifFPopenbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifFPopenbetween}[5]{% - \let\@dtl@dovalue\relax - \FPifgt{#1}{#2}% - \else - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}% - \fi - \FPiflt{#1}{#3}% - \ifx\@dtl@dovalue\relax - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#4}% - \fi - \else - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}% - \fi -\@dtl@dovalue -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifFPclosedbetween}\marg{num}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Determine if \meta{min} $\leq$ \meta{num} $\leq$ \meta{max}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifFPclosedbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifFPclosedbetween}[5]{% - \let\@dtl@dovalue\relax - \FPifgt{#1}{#3}% - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}% - \fi - \FPiflt{#1}{#2}% - \ifx\@dtl@dovalue\relax - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#5}% - \fi - \else - \def\@dtl@dovalue{#4}% - \fi -\@dtl@dovalue -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% The following conditionals are only meant to be used within -% \cs{DTLforeach} as they depend on the counter -% \texttt{DTLrow}\meta{n}. -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLiffirstrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLiffirstrow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLiffirstrow}[2]{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLiffirstrow\space can only - be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}% -\else -\expandafter\ifnum\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral -\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -=1\relax#1\else#2\fi -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLiflastrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLiflastrow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLiflastrow}[2]{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLiflastrow\space can only - be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}% -\else -\expandafter\ifnum\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral -\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname= -\value{DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel}% -#1\else #2\fi -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifoddrow}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifoddrow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLifoddrow}[2]{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLifoddrow\space can only - be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}% -\else -\expandafter\ifodd\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral -\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -#1\else #2\fi -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \subsection{ifthen Conditionals} -% The following commands provide conditionals \cs{DTLis}\ldots\ -% that can be used in \cs{ifthenelse}. First need to define -% a new conditional: -%\begin{macro}{\if@dtl@condition} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@dtl@condition -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first argument is less than second argument. -% If either argument is a string, a string comparison is used -% instead. -% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testlt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testlt}[2]{% -\DTLiflt{#1}{#2}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLislt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLislt}[2]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testlt{#1}{#2}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number is greater than second number. -% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testgt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testgt}[2]{% -\DTLifgt{#1}{#2}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisgt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisgt}[2]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testgt{#1}{#2}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number is equal to the second number. -% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testeq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testeq}[2]{% -\DTLifeq{#1}{#2}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLiseq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLiseq}[2]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testeq{#1}{#2}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number lies between second and third -% numbers. (End points included.) This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testclosedbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testclosedbetween}[3]{% -\DTLifclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisclosedbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisclosedbetween}[3]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number lies between second and third -% numbers. (End points excluded.) This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testopenbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testopenbetween}[3]{% -\DTLifopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisopenbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisopenbetween}[3]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number lies between second and third -% numbers. (End points included, all arguments are fixed point -% numbers in standard format.) This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testclosedbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPclosedbetween}[3]{% -\DTLifFPclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}% -{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPclosedbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisFPclosedbetween}[3]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPclosedbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number lies between second and third -% numbers. (End points excluded, all arguments are fixed point -% numbers in standard format.) This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testopenbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPopenbetween}[3]{% -\DTLifFPopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPopenbetween} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisFPopenbetween}[3]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPopenbetween{#1}{#2}{#3}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number is less than second -% number where both numbers are in standard format. -% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPislt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPislt}[2]{% -\FPiflt{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPlt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisFPlt}[2]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPislt{#1}{#2}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number is greater than second -% number where both numbers are in standard format. -% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPisgt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPisgt}[2]{% -\FPifgt{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPgt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisFPgt}[2]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPisgt{#1}{#2}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if two numbers are equal, where both numbers -% are in standard decimal format -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPiseq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPiseq}[2]{% -\FPifeq{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPeq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisFPeq}[2]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPiseq{#1}{#2}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number is less than or equal to second -% number where both numbers are in standard format. -% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPislteq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPislteq}[2]{% -\FPiflt{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi -\if@dtl@condition -\else - \dtl@testFPiseq{#1}{#2}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPlteq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisFPlteq}[2]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPislteq{#1}{#2}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if first number is greater than or equal to second -% number where both numbers are in standard format. -% This sets \cs{if@dtl@condition}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testFPisgteq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testFPisgteq}[2]{% -\FPifgt{#1}{#2}\@dtl@conditiontrue\else\@dtl@conditionfalse\fi -\if@dtl@condition -\else - \dtl@testFPiseq{#1}{#2}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisFPgteq} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisFPgteq}[2]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testFPisgteq{#1}{#2}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% -% Command to test if argument is a string. This sets -% \cs{if@dtl@condition} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@teststring} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@teststring}[1]{% -\DTLifstring{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisstring} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisstring}[1]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@teststring{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if argument is a numerical. This sets -% \cs{if@dtl@condition} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testnumerical} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testnumerical}[1]{% -\DTLifnumerical{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisnumerical} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisnumerical}[1]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testnumerical{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if argument is an integer. This sets -% \cs{if@dtl@condition} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testint} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testint}[1]{% -\DTLifint{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisint} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisint}[1]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testint{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if argument is a real. This sets -% \cs{if@dtl@condition} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testreal} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testreal}[1]{% -\DTLifreal{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLisreal} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLisreal}[1]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testreal{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if argument is a currency. This sets -% \cs{if@dtl@condition} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testcurrency} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testcurrency}[1]{% -\DTLifcurrency{#1}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLiscurrency} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLiscurrency}[1]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testcurrency{#1}\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Command to test if argument is a currency with given unit. This sets -% \cs{if@dtl@condition} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testcurrencyunit} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@testcurrencyunit}[2]{% -\DTLifcurrencyunit{#1}{#2}{\@dtl@conditiontrue}{\@dtl@conditionfalse}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Provide conditional command for use in \cs{ifthenelse} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLiscurrencyunit} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLiscurrencyunit}[2]{% -\TE@throw\noexpand\dtl@testcurrencyunit{#1}{#2}% -\noexpand\if@dtl@condition} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Defining New Databases} -% A database is stored internally as a list of lists, where each list -% is a row of data. The data is stored as a comma separated list of -% \marg{id}\marg{value} pairs, where \meta{id} is an -% identifier -% and \meta{value} is the value. \cs{DTLnewdb}\marg{name} -% initialises a database called \meta{name}. The keys associated -% with this database are stored in \cs{dtlkeys@}\meta{name} -% A new count register \cs{dtlrows@}\meta{db name} is created. -% This stores the total number of rows in the data base. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLnewdb} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLnewdb}[1]{% -\DTLifdbexists{#1}{% -\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#1' already exists}{}}{% -\dtl@message{Creating database `#1'}% -\expandafter\gdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{}% -\expandafter\gdef\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname{}% -\expandafter\global\expandafter\newcount\csname dtlrows@#1\endcsname}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLrowcount}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -% Number of rows in \meta{db name} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLrowcount} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLrowcount}[1]{% -\expandafter\number\csname dtlrows@#1\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLifempty}\marg{name}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Check if named database is empty (i.e.\ no rows have been added.) -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifdbempty} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLifdbempty}[3]{% -\DTLifdbexists{#1}{% -\expandafter\ifx\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname\@empty - #2% -\else - #3% -\fi}{% -\PackageError{Database `#1' doesn't exist}{}{}}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLnewrow}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -% Add a new row to named database. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLnewrow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLnewrow}[1]{% -\DTLifdbempty{#1}{% - \expandafter\gdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{{}}% - \expandafter\global\expandafter\advance - \csname dtlrows@#1\endcsname by 1\relax - \dtl@message{New row added to database `#1'}% -}{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@olddb\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@olddb,{}}% - \expandafter\xdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{\the\toks@}% - \expandafter\global\expandafter\advance - \csname dtlrows@#1\endcsname by 1\relax - \dtl@message{New row added to database `#1'}% -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLnewdbentry}\marg{db name}\marg{id}\marg{value}. -%\end{definition} -% Add an entry to the last row (adds new row if database is empty.) -% -% When a new entry is added, the control sequence -% \cs{@dtl@idtype@}\meta{db name}\texttt{@}\meta{id} is checked. -% This keeps track of the type of all the entries with the given ID -% for the given database. If this control -% sequence doesn't exist, a new one is created, and set to the -% relevant type: 0 (string), 1 (int) or 2 (real). If it exists, -% then it is set as follows: if has a value of 0 (string), it -% remains unchanged. If it has another value, then it is set to -% 2 (real) if it was either 1 or 2 and \meta{value} is 2, it is -% set to 1 if \meta{value} is 1, otherwise it remains unchanged. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLnewdbentry} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLnewdbentry}[3]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@dbvalue} to the value of this entry -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#3}% -\edef\@dtl@dbvalue{\the\@dtl@toks}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@dbid} to the entry ID. This uses \cs{edef} to allow -% for the ID to be stored in a control sequence. -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\@dtl@dbid{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set up the correct entry format: -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\edef\@dtl@dbentry{{\@dtl@dbid}{\the\@dtl@toks}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% If database is empty, add new row. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLifdbempty{#1}{\DTLnewrow{#1}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Add the entry to the last row of the database: -% Split the database into the last row -% (\cs{@dtl@dblastrow}), and everything except the last row -% (\cs{@dtl@dbrest}.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\dtl@choplast\expandafter{% -\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname}{\@dtl@dbrest}{\@dtl@dblastrow}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Check if the last row already contains an entry with this ID. -% If so, generate an error, otherwise append this entry to the -% row, and reconstruct database list. -% \begin{macrocode} -\dtl@ifrowcontains{#2}{\@dtl@dblastrow}{% -\PackageError{datatool}{Can't add entry with ID `#2' to current -row of database `#1'}{There is already an entry with this ID on -the current row}}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Append entry to last row -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@dbentry}% -\ifthenelse{\equal{}{\@dtl@dblastrow}}{% - \edef\@dtl@dblastrow{\the\@dtl@toks}% -}{% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@dblastrow}% - \edef\@dtl@dblastrow{\the\toks@,\the\@dtl@toks}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Reconstruct list. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@dblastrow}% -\ifthenelse{\equal{}{\@dtl@dbrest}}{% - \expandafter\long\expandafter\xdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{% - {\the\@dtl@toks}}% -}{% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@dbrest}% - \expandafter\long\expandafter\xdef\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname{% - \the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the keys -% \begin{macrocode} -\@dtl@setidtype{#1}{#2}{#3}% -\expandafter\@dtl@setkeys\expandafter{#2}{#1}% -}% -\dtl@message{Added #2\space -> #3\space to database `#1'}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{@dtl@setidtype}\marg{db name}\marg{id}\marg{value} -%\end{definition} -% Set the type for \meta{id} according to \meta{value}. -% If \meta{value} is empty, leave \cs{@dtl@idtype}\meta{id} -% unchanged (if defined) or define as empty if not defined. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@setidtype} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\@dtl@setidtype}[3]{% -\@dtl@checknumerical{#3}% -\def\@dtl@value{#3}% -\@ifundefined{@dtl@idtype@#1@#2}{% -\ifx\@dtl@value\@empty - \expandafter\gdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{}% -\else - \expandafter\xdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{% - \the\@dtl@datatype}% -\fi -}{% -\ifx\@dtl@value\@empty -\else - \expandafter\ifx\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname\@empty - \expandafter\xdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{% - \the\@dtl@datatype}% - \else - \expandafter\@dtl@tmpcount\expandafter= - \csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname - \ifcase\@dtl@tmpcount - % string, leave as it is - \or - % int, set to whatever \@dtl@datatype is - \expandafter\xdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{% - \the\@dtl@datatype}% - \or - % real, set to real unless <value> is a string - \ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \expandafter\gdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{0}% - \else - \expandafter\gdef\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname{2}% - \fi - \fi - \fi -\fi -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{@dtl@setkeys}\marg{key}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -% Adds \marg{key} to \cs{dtlkeys@}\meta{db name} if not already -% in it. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@setkeys} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@setkeys}[2]{% -\edef\@dtl@tmp{\csname dtlkeys@#2\endcsname}% -\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@tmp}% -\expandafter\ifx\csname dtlkeys@#2\endcsname\@empty - \expandafter\gdef\csname dtlkeys@#2\endcsname{#1}% -\else - \@for\dtl@key:=\@dtl@tmp\do{% - \ifthenelse{\equal{\dtl@key}{#1}}{\@endfortrue}{}% - }% - \if@endfor - \else - \expandafter\xdef\csname dtlkeys@#2\endcsname{\the\@dtl@toks,#1}% - \fi -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{@dtl@getidtype}\marg{db name}\marg{id} -%\end{definition} -% Get the data type for \meta{id} in given database. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@getidtype} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@getidtype}[2]{% -\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLifdbexists}\marg{db name}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% Check if a data base with the given name exists: -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifdbexists} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLifdbexists}[3]{% -\@ifundefined{dtldb@#1}{#3}{#2}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{dtl@ifrowcontains}\meta{id}\meta{cmd}\meta{true part}\meta{false -%part} -%\end{definition} -% Check to see if the row given by \meta{cmd} contains an -% entry with ID given by \meta{id}. If true, do \meta{true part}, -% otherwise do \meta{false part}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@ifrowcontains} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\dtl@ifrowcontains}[4]{% -\@for\@dtl@element:=#2\do{% -\dtl@getentryid{\@dtl@element}{\@dtl@entryid}% -\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{\@dtl@entryid}}{\@endfortrue}{}% -}% -\if@endfor #3\else #4\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{dtl@getentryid}\meta{entry cmd}\meta{id cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Get the ID for an entry given by \meta{entry cmd}, and stores in -% in \meta{id cmd}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@getentryid} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@getentryid}[2]{\expandafter\@dtl@getentryid#1#2} -\long\def\@dtl@getentryid#1#2#3{\def#3{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{dtl@getentryvalue}\meta{entry cmd}\meta{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Stores the entry value in \meta{cmd} for -% entry given by \meta{entry cmd}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@getentryvalue} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@getentryvalue}[2]{% -\expandafter\@dtl@getentryvalue#1#2} -\long\def\@dtl@getentryvalue#1#2#3{\gdef#3{#2}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{DTLforeach} can only be nested up to three levels. -% \cs{dtlforeachlevel} keeps track of the current level. -%\begin{macro}{\dtlforeachlevel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\global\newcount\dtlforeachlevel -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% The counter DTLrow\meta{n} keeps track of each row of data during -% the \meta{n} nested \cs{DTLforeach}. It is only incremented in the -% conditions (given by the optional argument) are met. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{DTLrowi} -\newcounter{DTLrowii} -\newcounter{DTLrowiii} -% \end{macrocode} -% Keep \sty{hyperref} happy -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{DTLrow} -\newcommand*{\theHDTLrow}{\arabic{DTLrow}} -\newcommand*{\theHDTLrowi}{\theHDTLrow.\arabic{DTLrowi}} -\newcommand*{\theHDTLrowii}{\theHDTLrowi.\arabic{DTLrowii}} -\newcommand*{\theHDTLrowiii}{\theHDTLrowii.\arabic{DTLrowiii}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsavelastrowcount}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Stores the maximum row count for the last \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsaverowcount} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsavelastrowcount}[1]{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel>2\relax - \def#1{0}% -\else - \ifnum\dtlforeachlevel<0\relax - \def#1{0}% - \else - \@dtl@tmpcount=\dtlforeachlevel - \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax - \edef#1{\expandafter\number - \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\@dtl@tmpcount\endcsname}% - \fi -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLforeach}\oarg{conditions}\marg{db name}\marg{values}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -% For each row of data in the database given by \meta{db name}, -% do \meta{text}, if the specified conditions are satisfied. -% The argument \marg{values} is a comma separated list of -% \meta{cmd}\texttt{=}\meta{key} pairs. At the start of each row, -% each of the commands in this list are set to the value of the -% entry with the corresponding key \meta{key}. -% (\cs{gdef} is used to ensure \cs{DTLforeach} works in a tabular -% environment.) The database is reconstructed to allow for -% rows to be edited. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLforeach} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLforeach}[4][\boolean{true}]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Check database exists -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLifdbexists{#2}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Keep \sty{hyperref} happy -% \begin{macrocode} -\refstepcounter{DTLrow}% -\global\c@DTLrow=\c@DTLrow -% \end{macrocode} -% Store database name -% \begin{macrocode} -\gdef\@dtl@dbname{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Increment level and check not exceeded 3 -% \begin{macrocode} -\global\advance\dtlforeachlevel by 1\relax -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel>3\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLforeach\space nested too -deeply}{}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Set level dependent information (needs to be global to ensure -% it works in the \env{tabular} environment.) Row counter: -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\global - \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname = 0\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Construct updated database: -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\global\expandafter\let - \csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname - =\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% Database name: -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\global\expandafter\let - \csname @dtl@dbname@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname - =\@dtl@dbname -% \end{macrocode} -% Iterate through each row -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@#2\endcsname% - \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set current row macro for this level -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\global\expandafter - \let\csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel - \endcsname=\@dtl@currentrow -% \end{macrocode} -% Assign commands to the required entries -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\relax#3\relax - \else - \@dtl@assign{#3}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Do the main body of text if condition is satisfied -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifthenelse{#1}{% - \refstepcounter{DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel}% - \expandafter\edef\expandafter\DTLcurrentindex\expandafter - {\arabic{DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel}}% - #4% - }{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Reconstruct database -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thiscurrentrow - \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't add this row if it is now empty -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\@dtl@thiscurrentrow\@empty - \else - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@thiscurrentrow}% - \expandafter - \ifx - \csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname - \@empty - \expandafter - \xdef\csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname{{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \else - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@foreachrows\expandafter - =\csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@foreachrows}% - \expandafter - \xdef\csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \fi - \fi -\@endforfalse -}% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@foreachrows\expandafter - =\csname @dtl@foreachrows@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -\expandafter\global - \expandafter\let\csname dtldb@#2\endcsname=\@dtl@foreachrows -\fi -\global\advance\dtlforeachlevel by -1\relax -}{% -\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#2' doesn't exist}{}}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLappendtorow}\marg{key}\marg{value} -%\end{definition} -% Appends entry to current row. (The current row is given by -% \cs{@dtl@thiscurrentrow@}\meta{n} where \meta{n} is roman -% numeral value of \cs{dtlforeachlevel}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLappendtorow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLappendtorow}[2]{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLappendtorow\space can only - be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@thisdb} to the current database name: -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisdb - \csname @dtl@dbname@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@dbvalue} to the value of this entry -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#2}% - \edef\@dtl@dbvalue{\the\@dtl@toks}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@dbid} to the entry ID. This uses \cs{edef} to allow -% for the ID to be stored in a control sequence. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\@dtl@dbid{#1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set up the correct entry format: -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\@dtl@dbentry{{\@dtl@dbid}{\the\@dtl@toks}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@thisrow} to the current row. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisrow - \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Check if there is already an entry with this key -% \begin{macrocode} - \dtl@ifrowcontains{#1}{\@dtl@thisrow}{% - \PackageError{datatool}{Can't add entry with ID `#1' to current - row of database `\@dtl@thisdb'}{There is already an entry with - this ID on the current row}}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Append entry to last row -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@dbentry}% - \ifx\@dtl@thisrow\@empty - \expandafter - \xdef\csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname{\the\@dtl@toks}% - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thisrow}% - \expandafter - \xdef\csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname{\the\toks@,\the\@dtl@toks}% - \fi - } -% \end{macrocode} -% Update key list -% \begin{macrocode} - \@dtl@setidtype{\@dtl@thisdb}{#1}{#2}% - \expandafter\@dtl@setkeys\expandafter{#1}{\@dtl@thisdb}% -% \end{macrocode} -% end the \cs{ifnum} -% \begin{macrocode} -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLremoveentryfromrow}\marg{key} -%\end{definition} -% Removes entry given by \meta{key} from current row. -% (The current row is given by -% \cs{@dtl@thiscurrentrow@}\meta{n} where \meta{n} is roman -% numeral value of \cs{dtlforeachlevel}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLremoveentryfromrow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLremoveentryfromrow}[1]{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLremoveentryfromrow\space can only - be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@thisdb} to the current database name: -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisdb - \csname @dtl@dbname@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@thisrow} to the current row. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisrow - \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Check row contains an entry with this key -% \begin{macrocode} - \dtl@ifrowcontains{#1}{\@dtl@thisrow}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Split row list -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\@dtl@pre=\@empty - \@for\dtl@thisentry:=\@dtl@thisrow\do{% - \dtl@getentryid\dtl@thisentry\@dtl@id - \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@id}{#1}}{% - }{% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@thisentry}% - \ifx\@dtl@pre\@empty - \edef\@dtl@pre{{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@pre}% - \edef\@dtl@pre{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \fi - } - }% - \expandafter\let - \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname - =\@dtl@pre - }{% - \PackageError{datatool}{Can't remove entry given by key `#1' - from current row in database `\@dtl@thisdb', no such entry}{}% - }% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLreplaceentryforrow}\marg{key}\marg{value} -%\end{definition} -% Replaces entry given by \meta{key} in current row with -% \meta{value}. -% (The current row is given by -% \cs{@dtl@thiscurrentrow@}\meta{n} where \meta{n} is roman -% numeral value of \cs{dtlforeachlevel}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLreplaceentryforrow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLreplaceentryforrow}[2]{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLreplaceentryforrow\space can only - be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@thisdb} to the current database name: -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisdb - \csname @dtl@dbname@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@dbvalue} to the value of this entry -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#2}% - \edef\@dtl@dbvalue{\the\@dtl@toks}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@dbid} to the entry ID. This uses \cs{edef} to allow -% for the ID to be stored in a control sequence. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\@dtl@dbid{#1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set up the correct entry format: -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\dtl@newentry{{\@dtl@dbid}{\the\@dtl@toks}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@thisrow} to the current row. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisrow - \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Check row contains an entry with this key -% \begin{macrocode} - \dtl@ifrowcontains{#1}{\@dtl@thisrow}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Split row list -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\@dtl@pre=\@empty - \@for\dtl@thisentry:=\@dtl@thisrow\do{% - \dtl@getentryid\dtl@thisentry\@dtl@id - \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@id}{#1}}{% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@newentry}% - }{% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@thisentry}% - } - \ifx\@dtl@pre\@empty - \edef\@dtl@pre{{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@pre}% - \edef\@dtl@pre{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \fi - }% - \expandafter\let - \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname - =\@dtl@pre - }{% - \PackageError{datatool}{Can't remove entry given by key `#1' - from current row in database `\@dtl@thisdb', no such entry}{}% - }% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLremovecurrentrow} -%\end{definition} -% Removes current row. This just sets the current row to empty -%\begin{macro}{\DTLremoveentryfromrow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLremovecurrentrow}[1]{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLremovecurrentrow\space can only - be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Set current row to empty. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let - \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname - =\@empty -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLforeachkeyinrow}\marg{cmd}\marg{text} -%\end{definition} -% Iterates through each key in the row, and does \meta{text}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLforeachkeyinrow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLforeachkeyinrow}[2]{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{\string\DTLforeachkeyinrow\space can only - be used inside \string\DTLforeach}{}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@thisrow} to the current row. -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@thisrow - \csname @dtl@thiscurrentrow@\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname -% \end{macrocode} -% Iterate through the row -% \begin{macrocode} - \@for\dtl@thisentry:=\@dtl@thisrow\do{% - \dtl@getentryvalue\dtl@thisentry{#1}% - #2% - }% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLaddentryforrow}\marg{db name}\marg{assign list}\marg{condition}\marg{key}\marg{value} -%\end{definition} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLaddentryforrow} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLaddentryforrow}[5]{% -\gdef\@dtl@dbname{#1}% -\DTLifdbexists{#1}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@dbvalue} to the value of this entry -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#5}% - \edef\@dtl@dbvalue{\the\@dtl@toks}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \cs{@dtl@dbid} to the entry ID. This uses \cs{edef} to allow -% for the ID to be stored in a control sequence. -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\@dtl@dbid{#4}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set up the correct entry format: -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\@dtl@dbentry{{\@dtl@dbid}{\the\@dtl@toks}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Store the database in \cs{@dtl@db} -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter - \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname% - \let\@dtl@prerow=\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% Iterate through each row of the database -% \begin{macrocode} - \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{% - \@dtl@assign{#2}% - \ifthenelse{#3}{% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@dbentry}% - \ifx\@dtl@currentrow\@empty - \edef\@dtl@currentrow{{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@currentrow}% - \edef\@dtl@currentrow{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \fi - \@endfortrue - }{% - }% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@currentrow}% - \ifx\@dtl@prerow\@empty - \edef\@dtl@prerow{{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@prerow}% - \edef\@dtl@prerow{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \fi -}% -\if@endfor - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@forremainder}% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@prerow}% - \edef\@dtl@prerow{\the\toks@,{\the\@dtl@toks}}% - \expandafter\global\expandafter - \let\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname=\@dtl@prerow -\else - \PackageError{datatool}{Unable to add `#5' for key `#4' - condition - not met for any row in database `#1'}{}% -\fi -\@endforfalse -}{% -\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#1' doesn't exist}{}}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{@dtl@assign}\marg{values} assigns each command in -% \meta{values} (see above) to the value of the corresponding -% ID for the row given by \cs{@dtl@currentrow}. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@assign} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@assign}[1]{% -\@dtl@assigncmd#1,\relax\@@ -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{\@dtl@assigncmd}\meta{cmd}=\meta{id}\cs{@nil} -%\end{definition} -% Assign \meta{cmd} to value given by \meta{id} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@assigncmd} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@assigncmd#1=#2,#3\@@{% -\@for\@dtl@entry:=\@dtl@currentrow\do{% -\dtl@getentryid\@dtl@entry\@dtl@id -\ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@id}{#2}}{% -\dtl@getentryvalue\@dtl@entry#1% -\@endfortrue}{}% -}% -\if@endfor -\else - \@dtl@setnull{#1}{#2}% -\fi -\@endforfalse -\ifx\relax#3% - \let\@dtl@next=\@dtl@assigncmdnoop -\else - \let\@dtl@next=\@dtl@assigncmd -\fi -\@dtl@next#3\@@ -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% End loop -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@assigncmdnoop} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@assigncmdnoop#1\@@{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\cs{@dtl@setnull}\marg{cmd}\marg{id} sets \meta{cmd} to either -% NULL or 0 depending on the data type for \meta{id}. (Database -% name should be stored in \cs{@dtl@dbname} prior to use. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@setnull} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@setnull}[2]{% -\@ifundefined{@dtl@idtype@\@dtl@dbname @#2}{% -\PackageError{datatool}{Key `#2' not defined in database -`\@dtl@dbname'}{}}{% -\edef\@dtl@tmp{0\@dtl@getidtype{\@dtl@dbname}{#2}}% -\expandafter\ifnum\@dtl@tmp=0\relax - \gdef#1{NULL}% -\else - \gdef#1{0}% -\fi -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@gathervalues}\marg{db name}\marg{row} -%\end{definition} -% Stores each element of \meta{row} in \meta{db name} into -% the command \cs{@dtl@key@}\meta{key}, where \meta{key} is the -% key for that element. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@gathervalues} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\dtl@gathervalues}[2]{% -\edef\@dtl@tmp{\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname}% -\def\@dtl@list{}% -\@for\dtl@key:=\@dtl@tmp\do{% - \expandafter\@dtl@setnull\expandafter{% - \csname @dtl@key@\dtl@key\endcsname}{\dtl@key}% - \@for\dtl@thiselement:=#2\do{% - \dtl@getentryid\dtl@thiselement\@dtl@id - \DTLifstringeq{\@dtl@id}{\dtl@key}{% - \dtl@getentryvalue\dtl@thiselement\@dtl@value% - \expandafter\protected@edef\csname @dtl@key@\dtl@key\endcsname{\@dtl@value}% - \@endfortrue}{}% - }% -\@endforfalse -}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsumforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Sums all entries for key \meta{key} over all databases listed -% in \meta{db list}, -% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. -% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that -% for \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsumforkeys} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsumforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and -\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{% -\def#4{0}% -\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{% - \DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{% - \expandafter - \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname% - \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{% - \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}% - \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{% - \protected@edef\DTLthisval{% - \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}% - \ifthenelse{#1}{\DTLadd{#4}{#4}{\DTLthisval}}{}% - }}% - }{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}% - }% -}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmeanforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Computes the arithmetic mean of all entries for each key in -% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list}, -% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. -% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that -% for \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmeanforkeys} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLmeanforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and -\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{% -\def#4{0}% -\def\dtl@n{0}% -\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{% -\DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{% - \expandafter - \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname% - \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{% - \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}% - \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{% - \protected@edef\DTLthisval{% - \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}% - \ifthenelse{#1}{% - \DTLadd{#4}{#4}{\DTLthisval}% - \DTLadd{\dtl@n}{\dtl@n}{1}% - }{}% - }}% -}{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}}}% -\ifnum\dtl@n=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{Can't compute mean, no data!}{}% -\else - \DTLdiv{#4}{#4}{\dtl@n}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLvarianceforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Computes the variance of all entries for each key in -% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list}, -% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. -% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that -% for \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLvarianceforkeys} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLvarianceforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and -\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{% -\DTLmeanforkeys[#1]{#2}{#3}{\dtl@mean}% -\def#4{0}% -\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{% - \DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{% - \expandafter - \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname - \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{% - \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}% - \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{% - \protected@edef\DTLthisval{% - \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}% - \ifthenelse{#1}{% - \DTLsub{\dtl@diff}{\DTLthisval}{\dtl@mean}% - \DTLmul{\dtl@diff}{\dtl@diff}{\dtl@diff}% - \DTLadd{#4}{#4}{\dtl@diff}% - }{}% - }}% - }{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}% - }% -}% -\ifnum\dtl@n=0\relax - \PackageError{datatool}{Can't compute variance, no data!}{}% -\else - \DTLdiv{#4}{#4}{\dtl@n}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsdforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Computes the standard deviation of all entries for each key in -% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list}, -% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. -% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that -% for \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsdforkeys} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsdforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and -\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{% -\DTLvarianceforkeys[#1]{#2}{#3}{#4}% -\DTLsqrt{#4}{#4}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLminforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Determines the minimum over all entries for each key in -% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list}, -% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. -% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that -% for \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLminforkeys} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLminforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and -\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{% -\def#4{}% -\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{% -\DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{% - \expandafter - \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname% - \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{% - \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}% - \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{% - \protected@edef\DTLthisval{% - \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}% - \ifthenelse{#1}{% - \ifx#4\@empty - \let#4=\DTLthisval - \else - \DTLmin{#4}{#4}{\DTLthisval}% - \fi - }{}% -}}% - }{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}% - }% -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmaxforkeys}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{key list}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Determines the maximum over all entries for each key in -% \meta{key list} over all databases in \meta{db list}, -% and stores in \meta{cmd}, which must be a control sequence. -% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that -% for \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmaxforkeys} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLmaxforkeys}[4][\boolean{true}\and -\DTLisnumerical{\DTLthisval}]{% -\def#4{}% -\@for\@dtl@dbname:=#2\do{% -\DTLifdbexists{\@dtl@dbname}{% - \expandafter - \let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@\@dtl@dbname\endcsname% - \@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{% - \dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\@dtl@currentrow}% - \@for\@dtl@key:=#3\do{% - \protected@edef\DTLthisval{% - \csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}% - \ifthenelse{#1}{% - \ifx#4\@empty - \let#4=\DTLthisval - \else - \DTLmax{#4}{#4}{\DTLthisval}% - \fi - }{}% -}}% - }{\PackageError{datatool}{Database `\@dtl@dbname' doesn't exist}{}% - }% -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLcomputebounds}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{x key}\marg{y key}\marg{minX cmd}\marg{minY cmd}\marg{maxX cmd}\marg{maxY cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Computes the maximum and minimum $x$ and $y$ values over all -% the databases listed in \meta{db list} where the $x$ value -% is given by \meta{x key} and the $y$ value is given by -% \meta{y key}. The results are stored in \meta{minX cmd}, -% \meta{minY cmd}, \meta{maxX cmd} and \meta{maxY cmd} in -% standard decimal format. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLcomputebounds} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLcomputebounds}[8][\boolean{true}]{% -\let#5=\relax -\let#6=\relax -\let#7=\relax -\let#8=\relax -\@for\dtl@thisdb:=#2\do{% - \DTLforeach[#1]{\dtl@thisdb}{\DTLthisX=#3,\DTLthisY=#4}{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\DTLthisX}{\dtl@decx}% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\DTLthisY}{\dtl@decy}% - \ifx#5\relax - \let#5=\dtl@decx - \let#6=\dtl@decy - \let#7=\dtl@decx - \let#8=\dtl@decy - \else - \FPmin{#5}{#5}{\dtl@decx}% - \FPmin{#6}{#6}{\dtl@decy}% - \FPmax{#7}{#7}{\dtl@decx}% - \FPmax{#8}{#8}{\dtl@decy}% - \fi - }% -}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLsort}\marg{sort criteria}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -% Sorts database \meta{db name} according to \marg{sort criteria}, -% which must be a comma separated list of keys, and optionally -% \texttt{=}\meta{order}, where \meta{order} is either -% "ascending" or "descending". -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsort} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsort}[2]{% -\edef\@dtl@sortorder{#1}% -\edef\@dtl@dbname{#2}% -\protected@edef\@dtl@list{\csname dtldb@#2\endcsname}% -\dtl@sortlist{\@dtl@list}{\@dtl@sortcriteria}% -\expandafter\global\expandafter - \let\csname dtldb@#2\endcsname=\@dtl@list} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{@dtl@sortcriteria}\marg{a}\marg{b} -%\end{definition} -% Sort criteria. \cs{@dtl@currentrow} and -% \cs{@dtl@sortorder} must be set before use. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@sortcriteria} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\@dtl@sortcriteria}[2]{% -\@for\@dtl@level:=\@dtl@sortorder\do{% - \expandafter\@dtl@getsortdirection\@dtl@level=\relax% - \dtl@compare{\@dtl@key}{#1}{#2}% - \multiply\dtl@sortresult by \@dtl@sortdirection\relax - \ifnum\dtl@sortresult=0\relax - \else - \@endfortrue - \fi -}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Get the direction from either \meta{key} or -% \meta{key}=\meta{direction}. Sets \cs{@dtl@sortdirection} to -% either -1 (ascending) or 1 (descending). -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@getsortdirection} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@getsortdirection#1=#2\relax{% -\def\@dtl@key{#1}% -\def\@dtl@sortdirection{#2}% -\ifx\@dtl@sortdirection\@empty - \def\@dtl@sortdirection{-1}% -\else - \@dtl@get@sortdirection#2% - \DTLifstringeq{\@dtl@sortdirection}{ascending}{% - \def\@dtl@sortdirection{-1}}{% - \DTLifstringeq{\@dtl@sortdirection}{descending}{% - \def\@dtl@sortdirection{1}}{% - \PackageError{datatool}{Invalid sort direction - `\@dtl@sortdirection'}{% - The sort direction can only be one of `ascending' or - `descending'}\def\@dtl@sortdirection{-1}}}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Get direction -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@get@sortdirection} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@get@sortdirection#1={\def\@dtl@sortdirection{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@compare}\marg{key}\marg{a}\marg{b} -%\end{definition} -% Compare \meta{a} and \meta{b} according to \meta{key} of -% database given by \cs{@dtl@dbname}. Sets \cs{dtl@sortresult}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@compare} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\dtl@compare}[3]{% -\protected@edef\dtl@arga{#2}\protected@edef\dtl@argb{#3}% -\dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\dtl@arga}% -\protected@edef\@dtl@a{\csname @dtl@key@#1\endcsname}% -\dtl@gathervalues{\@dtl@dbname}{\dtl@argb}% -\protected@edef\@dtl@b{\csname @dtl@key@#1\endcsname}% -\expandafter\@dtl@datatype\expandafter= - \csname @dtl@idtype@\@dtl@dbname @#1\endcsname\relax -\ifnum\@dtl@datatype=0\relax - \edef\@dtl@result{\noexpand\compare{\@dtl@a}{\@dtl@b}}% - \expandafter\dtl@sortresult\expandafter=\@dtl@result\relax -\else - \DTLifnumlt{\@dtl@a}{\@dtl@b}{\dtl@sortresult=-1\relax}{% - \DTLifnumgt{\@dtl@a}{\@dtl@b}{\dtl@sortresult=1\relax}{% - \dtl@sortresult=0\relax}}% -\fi -\dtl@message{`\@dtl@a' <=> `\@dtl@b' = \number\dtl@sortresult}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\subsection{General List Utilities} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{dtl@choplast}\marg{list}\marg{rest}\marg{last} -%\end{definition} -% Chop the last element off a comma separated list, putting the -% last element in the control sequence \meta{last} and putting -% the rest in the control sequence \meta{rest}. The control -% sequence \meta{list} is unchanged. If the list is empty, both -% \meta{last} and \meta{rest} will be empty. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@choplast} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@choplast}[3]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \meta{rest} to empty: -% \begin{macrocode} -\let#2\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% Set \meta{last} to empty: -% \begin{macrocode} -\let#3\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% Iterate through \meta{list}: -% \begin{macrocode} -\@for\@dtl@element:=#1\do{% -\ifx#3\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% First iteration, don't set \meta{rest}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \ifx#2\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% Second iteration, set \meta{rest} to \meta{last} (which is -% currently set to the previous value: -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#3}% - \edef#2{{\the\toks@}}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% Subsequent iterations, set \meta{rest} to \meta{rest},\meta{last} -% (\meta{last} is currently set to the previous value): -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#3}% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{#2}% - \edef#2{\the\@dtl@toks,{\the\toks@}}% - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Now set \meta{last} to current element. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let#3=\@dtl@element% -}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{dtl@chopfirst}\marg{list}\marg{first}\marg{rest} -%\end{definition} -% Chop first element off \meta{list} and store in \meta{first}. -% The remainder of the list is stored in \meta{rest}. (\meta{list} -% remains unchanged.) -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@chopfirst} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@chopfirst}[3]{% -\let#2=\@empty -\let#3=\@empty -\@for\@dtl@element:=#1\do{% - \let#2=\@dtl@element - \@endfortrue -}% -\if@endfor - \let#3=\@forremainder -\fi -\@endforfalse -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{dtl@sortlist}\marg{list}\marg{criteria cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Performs an insertion sort on \meta{list}, where \meta{criteria cmd} -% is a macro which takes two arguments \meta{a} and \meta{b}. -% \meta{criteria cmd} must set the count register \cs{dtl@sortresult} -% to either -1 (\meta{a} less than \meta{b}), 0 (\meta{a} is -% equal to \meta{b}) or 1 (\meta{a} is greater than \meta{b}.) -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@sortlist} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\dtl@sortlist}[2]{% -\def\@dtl@sortedlist{}% -\@for\@dtl@currentrow:=#1\do{% -\dtl@insertinto{\@dtl@currentrow}{\@dtl@sortedlist}{#2}% -\@endforfalse}% -\let#1=\@dtl@sortedlist -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{dtl@insertinto}\marg{element}\marg{sorted-list}\marg{criteria cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Inserts \meta{element} into the sorted list \meta{sorted-list} -% according to the criteria given by \meta{criteria cmd} (see above.) -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@insertinto} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newtoks\@dtl@toks -\newcommand{\dtl@insertinto}[3]{% -\def\@dtl@newsortedlist{}% -\@dtl@insertdonefalse -\@for\dtl@srtelement:=#2\do{% -\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@newsortedlist}% -\if@dtl@insertdone - \protected@edef\@dtl@newstuff{{\dtl@srtelement}}% -\else - \expandafter#3\expandafter{\dtl@srtelement}{#1}% - \ifnum\dtl@sortresult<0\relax - \protected@edef\@dtl@newstuff{{#1},{\dtl@srtelement}}% - \@dtl@insertdonetrue - \else - \protected@edef\@dtl@newstuff{{\dtl@srtelement}}% - \fi -\fi -\ifx\@dtl@newsortedlist\@empty - \protected@edef\@dtl@newsortedlist{\@dtl@newstuff}% -\else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@newsortedlist}% - \protected@edef\@dtl@newsortedlist{\the\toks@,\@dtl@newstuff}% -\fi -\@endforfalse -}% - \ifx\@dtl@newsortedlist\@empty - \protected@edef\@dtl@newsortedlist{{#1}}% - \else - \if@dtl@insertdone - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@newsortedlist}% - \protected@edef\@dtl@newsortedlist{\the\toks@,{#1}}% - \fi - \fi -\global\let#2=\@dtl@newsortedlist -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define conditional to indicate whether the new entry has -% been inserted into the sorted list. -%\begin{macro}{\if@dtl@insertdone} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@dtl@insertdone -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define \cs{dtl@sortresult} to be set by comparision macro. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@sortresult} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\dtl@sortresult -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Floating Point Arithmetic} -% The commands defined in this section all use the equivalent -% commands provided by the \sty{fp} package, but first convert -% the decimal number into the required format. -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLadd}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} = \meta{num1} + \meta{num2} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLadd} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLadd}[3]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}% -\FPadd{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgadd} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgadd}[3]{% -\DTLadd{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLaddall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Sums all the values in \meta{num list} and stores in -% \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLaddall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLaddall}[2]{% -\def\@dtl@sum{0}% -\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}% - \FPadd{\@dtl@sum}{\@dtl@sum}{\@dtl@num}% -} -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@sum}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@sum}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgaddall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgaddall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgaddall}[2]{% -\DTLaddall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLsub}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} = \meta{num1} - \meta{num2} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsub} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsub}[3]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}% -\FPsub{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgsub} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgsub}[3]{% -\DTLsub{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLmul}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} = \meta{num1} * \meta{num2} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmul} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLmul}[3]{% -\let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@empty -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty -\else - \let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@dtl@replaced -\fi -\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty -\else - \let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@dtl@replaced -\fi -\FPmul{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% -\ifx\@dtl@thisreplaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmul} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgmul}[3]{% -\DTLmul{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLdiv}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} = \meta{num1} / \meta{num2} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdiv} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdiv}[3]{% -\let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@empty -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty -\else - \let\@dtl@thisreplaced=\@dtl@replaced -\fi -\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}% -\FPdiv{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% -\ifx\@dtl@thisreplaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\else - \ifx\@dtl@thisreplaced\@dtl@replaced - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% - \else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% - \fi -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgdiv} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgdiv}[3]{% -\DTLdiv{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLabs}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} = abs(\meta{num}) -%\begin{macro}{\DTLabs} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLabs}[2]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\FPabs{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgabs} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgabs}[2]{% -\DTLabs{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLneg}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} = -\meta{num} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLneg} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLneg}[2]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\FPneg{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgneg} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgneg}[2]{% -\DTLneg{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLsqrt}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} = sqrt(\meta{num}) -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsqrt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsqrt}[2]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\FProot{\@dtl@tmpi}{\@dtl@numi}{2}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmpi}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmpi}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgsqrt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgsqrt}[2]{% -\DTLsqrt{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLmin}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} = min(\meta{num1}, \meta{num2}) -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmin} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLmin}[3]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}% -\FPiflt{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% - \dtl@ifsingle{#2}{% - \let#1=#2}{% - \def#1{#2}}% -\else - \dtl@ifsingle{#3}{% - \let#1=#3}{% - \def#1{#3}}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmin} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgmin}[3]{% -\DTLmin{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLminall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Finds the minimum value in \meta{num list} and stores in -% \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLminall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLminall}[2]{% -\let\@dtl@min=\@empty -\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}% - \ifx\@dtl@min\@empty - \let\@dtl@min=\@dtl@num - \else - \FPmin{\@dtl@min}{\@dtl@min}{\@dtl@num}% - \fi -} -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@min}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@min}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgminall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgminall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgminall}[2]{% -\DTLminall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLmax}\marg{cmd}\marg{num1}\marg{num2} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} = max(\meta{num1}, \meta{num2}) -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmax} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLmax}[3]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#3}{\@dtl@numii}% -\FPmax{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% -\FPifgt{\@dtl@numi}{\@dtl@numii}% - \dtl@ifsingle{#2}{% - \let#1=#2}{% - \def#1{#2}}% -\else - \dtl@ifsingle{#3}{% - \let#1=#3}{% - \def#1{#3}}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmax} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgmax}[3]{% -\DTLmax{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmaxall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Finds the maximum value in \meta{num list} and stores in -% \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmaxall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLmaxall}[2]{% -\let\@dtl@max=\@empty -\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}% - \ifx\@dtl@max\@empty - \let\@dtl@max\@dtl@num - \else - \FPmax{\@dtl@max}{\@dtl@max}{\@dtl@num}% - \fi -} -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@max}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@max}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgmaxall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmaxall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgmaxall}[2]{% -\DTLmaxall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLmeanforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Computes the arithmetic mean of all the values in \meta{num list} -% and stores in \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmeanforall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLmeanforall}[2]{% -\def\@dtl@mean{0}% -\def\@dtl@n{0}% -\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}% - \FPadd{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@num}% - \FPadd{\@dtl@n}{\@dtl@n}{1}% -} -\FPdiv{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@n}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@mean}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@mean}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgmeanforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgmeanforall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgmeanforall}[2]{% -\DTLmeanforall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLvarianceforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Computes the variance of all the values in \meta{num list} -% and stores in \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLvarianceforall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLvarianceforall}[2]{% -\def\@dtl@mean{0}% -\def\@dtl@n{0}% -\let\@dtl@decvals=\@empty -\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}% - \ifx\@dtl@decvals\@empty - \let\@dtl@decvals=\@dtl@num - \else - \edef\@dtl@decvals{\@dtl@decvals,\@dtl@num}% - \fi - \FPadd{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@num}% - \FPadd{\@dtl@n}{\@dtl@n}{1}% -} -\FPdiv{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@n}% -\def\@dtl@var{0}% -\@for\dtl@num:=\@dtl@decvals\do{% - \FPsub{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@mean}% - \FPmul{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@diff}% - \FPadd{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@diff}% -} -\FPdiv{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@var}{\@dtl@n}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@var}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@var}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgvarianceforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgvarianceforall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgvarianceforall}[2]{% -\DTLvarianceforall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsdforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Computes the standard deviation of all the values in \meta{num list} -% and stores in \meta{cmd} which must be a control sequence. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsdforall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsdforall}[2]{% -\def\@dtl@mean{0}% -\def\@dtl@n{0}% -\let\@dtl@decvals=\@empty -\@for\dtl@thisval:=#2\do{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@thisval}{\@dtl@num}% - \ifx\@dtl@decvals\@empty - \let\@dtl@decvals=\@dtl@num - \else - \edef\@dtl@decvals{\@dtl@decvals,\@dtl@num}% - \fi - \FPadd{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@num}% - \FPadd{\@dtl@n}{\@dtl@n}{1}% -} -\FPdiv{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@mean}{\@dtl@n}% -\def\@dtl@sd{0}% -\@for\dtl@num:=\@dtl@decvals\do{% - \FPsub{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@num}{\@dtl@mean}% - \FPmul{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@diff}{\@dtl@diff}% - \FPadd{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@diff}% -} -\FPdiv{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@n}% -\FProot{\@dtl@sd}{\@dtl@sd}{2}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@sd}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@sd}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgsdforall}\marg{cmd}\marg{num list} -%\end{definition} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgsdforall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgsdforall}[2]{% -\DTLsdforall{\@dtl@tmpi}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLround}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} rounded to \meta{num digits} -% digits after the decimal character. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLround} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLround}[3]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\FPround{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{#3}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLground} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLground}[3]{% -\DTLround{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLtrunc}\marg{cmd}\marg{num}\marg{num digits} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} truncated to \meta{num digits} -% digits after the decimal character. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLtrunc} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLtrunc}[3]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\FPtrunc{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}{#3}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgtrunc} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgtrunc}[3]{% -\DTLtrunc{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}{#3}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLclip}\marg{cmd}\marg{num} -%\end{definition} -% Sets \meta{cmd} to \meta{num} with all unnecessary 0's removed. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLclip} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLclip}[2]{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{#2}{\@dtl@numi}% -\FPclip{\@dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@numi}% -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \DTLdecimaltolocale{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\else - \DTLdecimaltocurrency{\@dtl@tmp}{#1}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Global version -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgclip} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgclip}[3]{% -\DTLclip{\@dtl@tmpii}{#2}% -\global\let#1=\@dtl@tmpii -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\subsection{String Macros} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLinitials}\marg{string} -%\end{definition} -% Convert a string into initials. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLinitials} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLinitials}[1]{% -\def\dtl@initialscmd{}% -\protected@edef\dtl@string{#1}% -\expandafter\dtl@initials\dtl@string{} \@nil -\dtl@initialscmd} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLstoreinitials}\marg{string}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Convert a string into initials and store in \meta{cmd} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLstoreinitials} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLstoreinitials}[2]{% -\def\dtl@initialscmd{}% -\protected@edef\dtl@string{#1}% -\expandafter\dtl@initials\dtl@string{} \@nil -\let#2=\dtl@initialscmd -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@initials} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@initials#1#2 #3{% -\def\dtl@tmp{#3}% -\dtl@initialshyphen#2-{}\dtl@endhyp -\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@initialscmd}% -\toks@{#1}% -\ifx\dtl@inithyphen\@empty -\else - \edef\dtl@initialscmd{\the\@dtl@toks\the\toks@}% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@initialscmd}% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@inithyphen}% -\fi -\ifx\@nnil\dtl@tmp - \edef\dtl@initialscmd{\the\@dtl@toks\the\toks@\DTLafterinitials}% - \let\dtl@initialsnext=\@gobble -\else - \edef\dtl@initialscmd{\the\@dtl@toks\the\toks@\DTLbetweeninitials}% - \let\dtl@initialsnext=\dtl@initials -\fi -\dtl@initialsnext#3} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@initialshyphen} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@initialshyphen#1-#2#3\dtl@endhyp{% -\def\dtl@inithyphen{#2}% -\ifx\dtl@inithyphen\@empty -\else - \edef\dtl@inithyphen{\DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen-#2}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define what to do after the final initial: -%\begin{macro}{\DTLafterinitials} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLafterinitials}{.} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define what to do between initials: -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbetweeninitials} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLbetweeninitials}{.} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define what to do before a hyphen: -%\begin{macro}{\DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLafterinitialbeforehyphen}{.} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifAllUpperCase} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifAllUpperCase}[3]{% -\protected@edef\dtl@tuc{#1}% -\expandafter\dtl@testifuppercase\dtl@tuc\@nil\relax -\if@dtl@condition#2\else#3\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testifalluppercase} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@testifuppercase#1#2{% -\def\dtl@argi{#1}% -\def\dtl@argii{#2}% -\def\dtl@tc@rest{}% -\ifx\dtl@argi\@nnil - \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\@nnil -\else - \ifx#1\protect - \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifuppercase - \else - \ifx\uppercase#1\relax - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \def\dtl@tc@rest{}% - \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\relax - \else - \edef\dtl@tc@arg{\string#1}% - \expandafter\dtl@test@ifuppercase\dtl@tc@arg\end - \ifx\dtl@argii\@nnil - \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifcasenoop - \fi - \fi - \fi -\fi -\ifx\dtl@testifuppernext\relax - \edef\dtl@dotestifuppernext{% - \noexpand\dtl@testifuppercase}% -\else - \ifx\dtl@testifuppernext\@nnil - \edef\dtl@dotestifuppernext{#2}% - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@tc@rest}% - \@dtl@toks{#2}% - \edef\dtl@dotestifuppernext{% - \noexpand\dtl@testifuppernext\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks}% - \fi -\fi -\dtl@dotestifuppernext -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@test@ifalluppercase} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@test@ifuppercase#1#2\end{% -\def\dtl@tc@rest{#2}% -\IfSubStringInString{\string\MakeUppercase}{#1#2}{% - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \def\dtl@tc@rest{}% - \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\relax -}{% - \IfSubStringInString{\string\MakeTextUppercase}{#1#2}{% - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \def\dtl@tc@rest{}% - \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\relax - }{% - \edef\dtl@uccode{\the\uccode`#1}% - \edef\dtl@code{\number`#1}% - \ifnum\dtl@code=\dtl@uccode\relax - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifuppercase - \else - \ifnum\dtl@uccode=0\relax - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifuppercase - \else - \@dtl@conditionfalse - \let\dtl@testifuppernext=\dtl@testifcasenoop - \fi - \fi -}}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testifcasenoop} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@testifcasenoop#1\@nil{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLifAllLowerCase} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLifAllLowerCase}[3]{% -\protected@edef\dtl@tlc{#1}% -\expandafter\dtl@testiflowercase\dtl@tlc\@nil\relax -\if@dtl@condition#2\else#3\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@testifalllowercase} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@testiflowercase#1#2{% -\def\dtl@argi{#1}% -\def\dtl@argii{#2}% -\ifx\dtl@argi\@nnil - \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\@nnil -\else - \ifx#1\protect - \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testiflowercase - \else - \ifx\lowercase#1\relax - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \def\dtl@tc@rest{}% - \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\relax - \else - \edef\dtl@tc@arg{\string#1}% - \expandafter\dtl@test@iflowercase\dtl@tc@arg\end - \ifx\dtl@argii\@nnil - \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testifcasenoop - \fi - \fi - \fi -\fi -\ifx\dtl@testiflowernext\relax - \edef\dtl@dotestiflowernext{% - \noexpand\dtl@testiflowercase}% -\else - \ifx\dtl@testiflowernext\@nnil - \edef\dtl@dotestiflowernext{#2}% - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@tc@rest}% - \@dtl@toks{#2}% - \edef\dtl@dotestiflowernext{% - \noexpand\dtl@testiflowernext\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks}% - \fi -\fi -\dtl@dotestiflowernext -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@test@ifalllowercase} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@test@iflowercase#1#2\end{% -\def\dtl@tc@rest{#2}% -\IfSubStringInString{\string\MakeLowercase}{#1#2}{% - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \def\dtl@tc@rest{}% - \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\relax -}{% - \IfSubStringInString{\string\MakeTextLowercase}{#1#2}{% - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \def\dtl@tc@rest{}% - \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\relax - }{% - \edef\dtl@lccode{\the\lccode`#1}% - \edef\dtl@code{\number`#1}% - \ifnum\dtl@code=\dtl@lccode\relax - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testiflowercase - \else - \ifnum\dtl@lccode=0\relax - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testiflowercase - \else - \@dtl@conditionfalse - \let\dtl@testiflowernext=\dtl@testifcasenoop - \fi - \fi -}}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\subsection{Saving a database to an external file} -% -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@write} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newwrite\@dtl@write -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLsavedb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename} -%\end{definition} -% Save a database as an ASCII data file using the separator -% and delimiter given by \cs{@dtl@separator} and \cs{@dtl@delimiter}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsavedb} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsavedb}[2]{% -\DTLifdbexists{#1}{% -\openout\@dtl@write=#2% -\edef\@dtl@keys{\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname}% -\def\@dtl@header{}% -\@for\@dtl@key:=\@dtl@keys\do{% -\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@header}% -\ifx\@dtl@header\@empty - \IfSubStringInString{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@key}{% - \protected@edef\@dtl@header{% - \@dtl@delimiter\@dtl@key\@dtl@delimiter}% - }{% - \protected@edef\@dtl@header{\@dtl@key}% - }% -\else - \IfSubStringInString{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@key}{% - \protected@edef\@dtl@header{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@separator - \@dtl@delimiter\@dtl@key\@dtl@delimiter}% - }{% - \protected@edef\@dtl@header{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@separator - \@dtl@key}% - }% -\fi -}% -\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\@dtl@header}% -\expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname% -\@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{% -\dtl@gathervalues{#1}{\@dtl@currentrow}% -\def\@dtl@outputrow{}% -\@for\@dtl@key:=\@dtl@keys\do{% -\protected@edef\@dtl@element{\csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}% -\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@outputrow}% -\ifx\@dtl@outputrow\@empty - \IfSubStringInString{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@element}{% - \protected@edef\@dtl@outputrow{% - \@dtl@delimiter\@dtl@element\@dtl@delimiter}% - }{% - \protected@edef\@dtl@outputrow{\@dtl@element}% - }% -\else - \IfSubStringInString{\@dtl@separator}{\@dtl@element}{% - \protected@edef\@dtl@outputrow{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@separator - \@dtl@delimiter\@dtl@element\@dtl@delimiter}% - }{% - \protected@edef\@dtl@outputrow{\the\@dtl@toks\@dtl@separator - \@dtl@element}% - }% -\fi -}% -\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\@dtl@outputrow}% -}% -\closeout\@dtl@write -}{% -\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#1' doesn't exist}{}% -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLsavetexdb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename} -%\end{definition} -% Save a database as a \LaTeX\ file. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsavetexdb} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsavetexdb}[2]{% -\DTLifdbexists{#1}{% -\openout\@dtl@write=#2% -\edef\@dtl@keys{\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname}% -\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\string\DTLnewdb{#1}}% -\expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@db\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname% -\@for\@dtl@currentrow:=\@dtl@db\do{% -\dtl@gathervalues{#1}{\@dtl@currentrow}% -\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\string\DTLnewrow{#1}}% -\@for\@dtl@key:=\@dtl@keys\do{% -\protected@edef\@dtl@element{\csname @dtl@key@\@dtl@key\endcsname}% -\protected@write\@dtl@write{}{\string\DTLnewdbentry - {#1}{\@dtl@key}{\@dtl@element}}% -}% -}% -\closeout\@dtl@write -}{% -\PackageError{datatool}{Database `#1' doesn't exist}{}% -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\subsection{Loading a database from an external file} -% -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@read} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newread\@dtl@read -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Keep track of current column in data file -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@entrycr} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\dtl@entrycr -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLloaddb}\marg{db name}\marg{filename} -%\end{definition} -% Create a new database called \meta{db name}, and load the data in -% \meta{filename} into it. The separator and delimiter used in -% the file must match \cs{@dtl@separator} and \cs{@dtl@delimiter}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLloaddb} -% \begin{macrocode} -\gdef\DTLloaddb#1#2{% -\IfFileExists{#2}{% -\begingroup -\catcode`\"12\relax -\openin\@dtl@read=#2% -\dtl@message{Reading `#2'}% -\DTLnewdb{#1}% -\ifeof\@dtl@read -\else - \loop - \@dtl@conditionfalse - \ifeof\@dtl@read - \else - \read\@dtl@read to \@dtl@line - \dtl@trim\@dtl@line - \if\@dtl@line\par - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \fi - \fi - \if@dtl@condition - \repeat - \ifeof\@dtl@read - \else - \protected@edef\@dtl@lin@{\@dtl@separator\@dtl@line\@dtl@separator}% - \@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax - \whiledo{\not\equal{\@dtl@lin@}{\@dtl@separator}}{% - \expandafter\@dtl@lopoff\@dtl@lin@\to\@dtl@lin@\@dtl@key - \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@key}% - \expandafter - \edef\csname @dtl@inky@\romannumeral\@dtl@tmpcount\endcsname{% - \the\@dtl@toks}% - }% - \ifeof\@dtl@read - \else - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \loop - \read\@dtl@read to \@dtl@line - \dtl@trim\@dtl@line - \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@line}{}}{}% - {% - \DTLnewrow{#1}% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@line}% - \edef\@dtl@lin@{\@dtl@separator\the\@dtl@toks - \@dtl@separator}% - \dtl@entrycr=0\relax - \whiledo{\not\equal{\@dtl@lin@}{\@dtl@separator}}{% - \expandafter\@dtl@lopoff\@dtl@lin@\to - \@dtl@lin@\@dtl@thisentry - \advance\dtl@entrycr by 1\relax - \edef\@dtl@thiskey{% - \csname @dtl@inky@\romannumeral\dtl@entrycr\endcsname}% - \DTLnewdbentry{#1}{\@dtl@thiskey}{\@dtl@thisentry}% - }% - }% - \ifeof\@dtl@read \@dtl@conditionfalse\fi - \if@dtl@condition - \repeat - \fi - \fi -\fi -\closein\@dtl@read -\endgroup -}{% -\PackageError{datatool}{Can't load database `#1' (file `#2' -doesn't exist)}{}% -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@trim}\marg{line} -%\end{definition} -% Trims the trailing space from \meta{line}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@trim} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\dtl@trim}[1]{% -\def\@dtl@trmstr{}% -\expandafter\@dtl@starttrim#1\@nil% -\let#1=\@dtl@trmstr -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Start trimming -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@starttrim} -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@dtl@starttrim#1#2{% -\ifx\par#1% - \def\@dtl@dotrim{\@dtl@trim{} #2}% -\else - \def\@dtl@dotrim{\@dtl@trim#1#2}% -\fi -\@dtl@dotrim% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@trim} -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@dtl@trim#1 \@nil{\long\def\@dtl@trmstr{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Load a raw database (substitutes "%" $\to$ "\%", -% "$" $\to$ "\$", "&" $\to$ "\&", "#" $\to$ "\#", -% "~" $\to$ "\textasciitilde", "_" $\to$ "\_" -% and "^" $\to$ "\textasciicircum".) -%\begin{macro}{\DTLloadrawdb} -% \begin{macrocode} -\gdef\DTLloadrawdb#1#2{% -\IfFileExists{#2}{% -\openin\@dtl@read=#2% -\dtl@message{Reading `#2'}% -\DTLnewdb{#1}% -\ifeof\@dtl@read -\else - \loop - \@dtl@conditionfalse - \ifeof\@dtl@read - \else - \@dtl@rawread\@dtl@read to\@dtl@line - \dtl@trim\@dtl@line - \if\@dtl@line\par - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \fi - \fi - \if@dtl@condition - \repeat - \ifeof\@dtl@read - \else - \dtl@domappings\@dtl@line - \protected@edef\@dtl@lin@{\@dtl@separator\@dtl@line\@dtl@separator}% - \@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax - \whiledo{\not\equal{\@dtl@lin@}{\@dtl@separator}}{% - \expandafter\@dtl@lopoff\@dtl@lin@\to\@dtl@lin@\@dtl@key - \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@key}% - \expandafter - \edef\csname @dtl@inky@\romannumeral\@dtl@tmpcount\endcsname{% - \the\@dtl@toks}% - }% - \ifeof\@dtl@read - \else - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \loop - \@dtl@rawread\@dtl@read to\@dtl@line - \dtl@trim\@dtl@line - \ifthenelse{\equal{\@dtl@line}{}}{}% - {% - \DTLnewrow{#1}% - \dtl@domappings\@dtl@line - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@line}% - \edef\@dtl@lin@{\@dtl@separator\the\@dtl@toks - \@dtl@separator}% - \dtl@entrycr=0\relax - \whiledo{\not\equal{\@dtl@lin@}{\@dtl@separator}}{% - \expandafter\@dtl@lopoff\@dtl@lin@\to - \@dtl@lin@\@dtl@thisentry - \advance\dtl@entrycr by 1\relax - \edef\@dtl@thiskey{% - \csname @dtl@inky@\romannumeral\dtl@entrycr\endcsname}% - \DTLnewdbentry{#1}{\@dtl@thiskey}{\@dtl@thisentry}% - }% - }% - \ifeof\@dtl@read \@dtl@conditionfalse\fi - \if@dtl@condition - \repeat - \fi - \fi -\fi -\closein\@dtl@read -}{% -\PackageError{datatool}{Can't load database `#1' (file `#2' -doesn't exist)}{}% -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{@dtl@rawread}\meta{number}to\meta{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Reads in a raw line from file given by \meta{number} -% converts special characters and stores in \meta{cmd} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@rawread} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup -\catcode`\%=\active -\catcode`$=\active -\catcode`&=\active -\catcode`~=\active -\catcode`_=\active -\catcode`^=\active -\catcode`#=\active -\catcode`?=6\relax -\catcode`<=1\relax -\catcode`>=2\relax -\catcode`\{=\active -\catcode`\}=\active -\gdef\@dtl@rawread?1to?2<\relax -<<\catcode`\%=\active -\catcode`$=\active -\catcode`&=\active -\catcode`~=\active -\catcode`_=\active -\catcode`^=\active -\catcode`#=\active -\catcode`\{=\active -\catcode`\}=\active -\def%<\noexpand\%>\relax -\def$<\noexpand\$>\relax -\def&<\&>\relax -\def#<\#>\relax -\def~<\noexpand\textasciitilde>\relax -\def_<\noexpand\_>\relax -\def^<\noexpand\textasciicircum>\relax -\@dtl@activatebraces -\@dtl@doreadraw?1?2>>> -\gdef\@dtl@doreadraw?1?2<\relax -\read?1 to \tmp -\xdef?2<\tmp>\relax -> -\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% \cs{@dtl@activatebraces} resets braces for \cs{@dtl@rawread} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@activatebraces} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup -\catcode`\{=\active -\catcode`\}=\active -\catcode`<=1\relax -\catcode`>=2\relax -\gdef\@dtl@activatebraces<% - \catcode`\{=\active - \catcode`\}=\active - \def{<\noexpand\{>% - \def}<\noexpand\}>% ->% -\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLrawmap}\marg{string}\marg{replacement} -%\end{definition} -% Additional mappings to perform when reading a raw data file -%\begin{macro}{\DTLrawmap} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLrawmap}[2]{% -\expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@rawmappings}% -\ifx\@dtl@rawmappings\@empty - \def\@dtl@rawmappings{{#1}{#2}}% -\else - \def\@dtl@tmp{{#1}{#2}} - \protected@edef\@dtl@rawmappings{\the\@dtl@toks,\@dtl@tmp} -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@rawmappings} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@rawmappings}{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{dtl@domappings}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Do all mappings in string given by \meta{cmd}. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@domappings} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@domappings}[1]{% -\@for\@dtl@map:=\@dtl@rawmappings\do{% - \expandafter\DTLsubstitute\expandafter#1\@dtl@map -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsubstitute}\marg{cmd}\marg{original}\marg{replacement} -%\end{definition} -% Substitutes first occurence of \meta{original} with -% \marg{replacement} within the string given by \meta{cmd} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsubstitute} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLsubstitute}[3]{% -\def\dtl@splitstr##1#2##2\@nil{% -\def\@dtl@beforepart{##1}% -\def\@dtl@afterpart{##2}% -\ifx\@dtl@afterpart\@empty - \let\@dtl@replaced=\@empty -\else - \def\@dtl@replaced{#2}% - \dtl@split@str##2\@nil -\fi -}% -\def\dtl@split@str##1#2\@nil{% -\def\@dtl@afterpart{##1}}% -\expandafter\dtl@splitstr#1#2\@nil -\ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty -\else - \def#1{}% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@beforepart}% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}% - \protected@edef#1{\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks#3}% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@afterpart}% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}% - \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLsubstituteall}\marg{cmd}\marg{original}\marg{replacement} -%\end{definition} -% Substitutes all occurences of \meta{original} with -% \marg{replacement} within the string given by \meta{cmd} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsubstituteall} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\DTLsubstituteall}[3]{% -\def\dtl@splitstr##1#2##2\@nil{% -\def\@dtl@beforepart{##1}\def\@dtl@afterpart{##2}}% -\let\@dtl@replaced=\@empty -\IfSubStringInString{#2}{#1}{% - \expandafter\dtl@splitstr#1\@nil - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#2}% - \edef\@dtl@replaced{\the\toks@}% - \def#1{}% - \@dtl@conditiontrue - \loop - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@beforepart}% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}% - \protected@edef#1{\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks#3}% - \IfSubStringInString{#2}{\@dtl@afterpart}{% - \expandafter\dtl@splitstr\@dtl@afterpart\@nil - }{\@dtl@conditionfalse}% - \if@dtl@condition - \repeat - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\@dtl@afterpart}% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}% - \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\@dtl@toks}% -}{}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\subsection{Currencies} -% \cs{@dtl@currencies} stores all known currencies. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@currencies} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@currencies}{\$,\pounds} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLaddcurrency}\marg{symbol} -%\end{definition} -% Adds \meta{symbol} to the list of known currencies -%\begin{macro}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol}[1]{% -\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@currencies}% -\@dtl@toks{#1}% -\edef\@dtl@currencies{\the\@dtl@toks,\the\toks@}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% If any of the following currency commands have been defined, -% add them to the list: -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% -\@ifundefined{texteuro}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\texteuro}}% -\@ifundefined{textdollar}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textdollar}}% -\@ifundefined{textstirling}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textstirling}}% -\@ifundefined{textyen}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textyen}}% -\@ifundefined{textwon}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textwon}}% -\@ifundefined{textcurrency}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\textcurrency}}% -\@ifundefined{euro}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\euro}}% -\@ifundefined{yen}{}{\DTLnewcurrencysymbol{\yen}}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{@dtl@standardize@currency}\marg{cmd} -%\end{definition} -% Substitutes the first currency symbol found in \meta{cmd} -% with "\$". This is used when testing text to determine -% if it is currency. The original currency symbol is stored -% in \cs{@dtl@org@currency}, so that it can be replaced later. -% If no currency symbol is found, \cs{@dtl@org@currency} will -% be empty. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@standardize@currency} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\@dtl@standardize@currency}[1]{% -\def\@dtl@org@currency{}% -\@for\@dtl@thiscurrency:=\@dtl@currencies\do{% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thiscurrency}% - \edef\@dtl@dosubs{\noexpand\DTLsubstitute{\noexpand#1}% - {\the\toks@}{\noexpand\$}}% - \@dtl@dosubs - \ifx\@dtl@replaced\@empty - \else - \let\@dtl@org@currency=\@dtl@replaced - \@endfortrue - \fi -}% -\@endforfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{@dtl@currency} is set by \cs{DTLlocaltodecimal} and -%\cs{@dtl@checknumerical}. It is used by \cs{DTLdecimaltocurrency}. -% Set to "\$" by default. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@currency} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@dtl@currency}{\$} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\cs{DTLsetdefaultcurrency}\marg{symbol} sets the default currency. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetdefaultcurrency} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsetdefaultcurrency}[1]{% -\renewcommand*{\@dtl@currency}{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@ifsingle}\marg{arg}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} -%\end{definition} -% If there is only one object in \meta{arg} (without expansion) -% do \meta{true part}, otherwise do false part. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@ifsingle} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\dtl@ifsingle}[3]{% -\@dtl@ifsingle#1\@nil{#2}{#3}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@ifsingle} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@ifsingle#1#2\@nil#3#4{% -\def\dtl@sg@arg{#2}% -\ifx\dtl@sg@arg\@empty - #3% -\else - #4% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\subsection{Debugging commands} -% These commands are provided to assist debugging -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtlshowdb}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -% Shows the database. -%\begin{macro}{\dtlshowdb} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtlshowdb}[1]{% -\expandafter\show\csname dtldb@#1\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtlshowdbkeys}\marg{db name} -%\end{definition} -% Shows the key list for the named database. -%\begin{macro}{\dtlshowdbkeys} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtlshowdbkeys}[1]{% -\expandafter\show\csname dtlkeys@#1\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtlshowtype}\marg{db name}\marg{key} -%\end{definition} -% Show the data type for given key in the named database. -% This should be an integer from 0 to 3. -%\begin{macro}{\dtlshowtype} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtlshowtype}[2]{% -\expandafter\show\csname @dtl@idtype@#1@#2\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%</datatool.sty> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*datapie.sty> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -%\section{datapie.sty} -% Declare package: -% \begin{macrocode} -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{datapie}[2007/07/23 v1.0 (NLCT)] -% \end{macrocode} -% Require \sty{xkeyval} package -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{xkeyval} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define a conditional to determine whether to use colour or -% grey scale. -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLcolorpiechart} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLcolorpiechart -\DTLcolorpiecharttrue -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Package options to change the conditional: -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{color}{\DTLcolorpiecharttrue} -\DeclareOption{gray}{\DTLcolorpiechartfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define boolean keys to govern label rotations. -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLrotateinner} -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{datapie}[DTL]{rotateinner}[true]{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLrotateouter} -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{datapie}[DTL]{rotateouter}[true]{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Set defaults: -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLrotateinnerfalse -\DTLrotateouterfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% Package options to change \cs{DTLrotateinner} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{rotateinner}{\DTLrotateinnertrue} -\DeclareOption{norotateinner}{\DTLrotateinnerfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% Package options to change \cs{DTLrotateouter} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{rotateouter}{\DTLrotateoutertrue} -\DeclareOption{norotateouter}{\DTLrotateouterfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% Process options: -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProcessOptions -% \end{macrocode} -% Required packages: -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{datatool} -\RequirePackage{tikz} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define some variables that govern the appearance of the pie -% chart. -% -% The radius of the pie chart: -%\begin{macro}{\DTLradius} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLradius -\DTLradius=2cm -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Inner label offset ratio -%\begin{macro}{\DTLinnerratio} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLinnerratio}{0.5} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Outer label offset ratio -%\begin{macro}{\DTLouterratio} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLouterratio}{1.25} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Cutaway offset ration -%\begin{macro}{\DTLcutawayratio} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*\DTLcutawayratio{0.2} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The angle of the first segment -%\begin{macro}{\DTLstartangle} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLstartangle}{0} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@inneroffset} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\dtl@inneroffset -\dtl@inneroffset=\DTLinnerratio\DTLradius -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@outeroffset} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\dtl@outeroffset -\dtl@outeroffset=\DTLouterratio\DTLradius -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@cutawayoffset} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\dtl@cutawayoffset -\dtl@cutawayoffset=\DTLcutawayratio\DTLradius -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \cs{dtl@piecutaways} is a comma separated list of segments that -% need to be cut away from the pie chart. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@piecutaways} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@piecutaways}{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% \cs{dtl@innerlabel} specifies the label to appear inside -% the segment. By default this is the variable used to create -% the pie chart. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@innerlabel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@innerlabel{\DTLpievariable}% -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@outerlabel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@outerlabel{}% -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% \counterfmt{DTLpieroundvar} is a counter governing the number of digits -% to round to when using \cs{FPround}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{DTLpieroundvar} -\setcounter{DTLpieroundvar}{1} -% \end{macrocode} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdisplayinnerlabel}\marg{label} -%\end{definition} -% Command used to format the inner label. This just does the -% label by default. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdisplayinnerlabel}[1]{#1} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdisplayouterlabel}\marg{label} -%\end{definition} -% Command used to format the outer label. This just does the -% label by default. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplayouterlabel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdisplayouterlabel}[1]{#1} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{DTLpiepercent} -% returns the percentage value of the current segment. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLpiepercent} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLpiepercent}{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datapie}{Can't use - \string\DTLpiepercent\space outside - \string\DTLpiechart}{}% -\else - \csname dtl@piepercent@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \cs{DTLpieatbegintikz} specifies any commands -% to apply at the start of the \env{tikzpicture} environment. -% By default it does nothing, but can be set -% to any of the \sty{pgf} package's transformation commands, e.g.\ -%\begin{verbatim} -%\renewcommand*{\DTLpieatbegintikz}{% -%\pgftransformcm{2}{0}{0}{1}{\pgforigin}} -%\end{verbatim} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLpieatbegintikz} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLpieatbegintikz}{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \cs{DTLpieatendtikz} specifies any commands -% to apply at the end of the \env{tikzpicture} environment. -% By default it does nothing. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLpieatendtikz} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLpieatendtikz}{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLsetpiesegmentcolor}\marg{n}\marg{color} -%\end{definition} -% Assign colour name \meta{color} to the \meta{n}th segment. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetpiesegmentcolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsetpiesegmentcolor}[2]{% -\expandafter\def\csname dtlpie@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname{#2}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgetpiesegmentcolor}\marg{n} -%\end{definition} -% Get the colour specification for segment \meta{n} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgetpiesegmentcolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgetpiesegmentcolor}[1]{% -\csname dtlpie@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdopiesegmentcolor}\marg{n} -%\end{definition} -% Set the colour to that for segment \meta{n} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdopiesegmentcolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdopiesegmentcolor}[1]{% -\expandafter\color\expandafter -{\csname dtlpie@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\cs{DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor} -% sets the colour to that of the current segment. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor}{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{datapie}{Can't use - \string\DTLdocurrentpiesegmentcolor\space outside - \string\DTLpiechart}{}% -\else - \expandafter\DTLdopiesegmentcolor\expandafter{% - \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname}% -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{DTLpieoutlinecolor} specifies what colour to draw the -% outline. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLpieoutlinecolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLpieoutlinecolor}{black} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{DTLpieoutlinewidth} specifies the line width of the outline: -% Outline is only drawn if the linewidth is greater than 0pt. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLpieoutlinewidth} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLpieoutlinewidth -\DTLpieoutlinewidth=0pt -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Set the default colours. If there are more than eight segments, -% more colours will need to be defined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLcolorpiechart - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{1}{red} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{2}{green} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{3}{blue} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{4}{yellow} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{5}{magenta} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{6}{cyan} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{7}{orange} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{8}{white} -\else - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{1}{black!15} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{2}{black!25} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{3}{black!35} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{4}{black!45} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{5}{black!55} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{6}{black!65} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{7}{black!75} - \DTLsetpiesegmentcolor{8}{black!85} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Define keys for \cs{DTLpiechart} optional argument. -% Set the starting angle of the first segment. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{start}{\def\DTLstartangle{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the radius of the pie chart (must be set prior to -% inneroffset and outeroffset keys.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{radius}{\DTLradius=#1\relax -\dtl@inneroffset=\DTLinnerratio\DTLradius -\dtl@outeroffset=\DTLouterratio\DTLradius -\dtl@cutawayoffset=\DTLcutawayratio\DTLradius} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the inner ratio. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{innerratio}{% -\def\DTLinnerratio{#1}% -\dtl@inneroffset=\DTLinnerratio\DTLradius} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the outer ratio -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{outerratio}{% -\def\DTLouterratio{#1}% -\dtl@outeroffset=\DTLouterratio\DTLradius} -% \end{macrocode} -% The cutaway offset ratio -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{cutawayratio}{% -\def\DTLcutawayratio{#1}% -\dtl@cutawayoffset=\DTLcutawayratio\DTLradius} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the inner offset as an absolute value (not dependent -% on the radius.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{inneroffset}{% -\dtl@inneroffset=#1} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the outer offset as an absolute value (not dependent -% on the radius.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{outeroffset}{% -\dtl@outeroffset=#1} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the cutaway offset as an absolute value (not dependent -% on the radius.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{cutawayoffset}{% -\dtl@cutawayoffset=#1} -% \end{macrocode} -% List of cut away segments. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{cutaway}{% -\renewcommand*{\dtl@piecutaways}{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Variable used to create the pie chart. (Must be a control -% sequence.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{variable}{% -\def\DTLpievariable{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Inner label -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{innerlabel}{% -\def\dtl@innerlabel{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Outer label -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{datapie}{outerlabel}{% -\def\dtl@outerlabel{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLpiechart}\oarg{conditions}\marg{option list}\marg{db name}\marg{assign list} -%\end{definition} -% Make a pie chart from data given in data base \meta{db name}, -% where \meta{assign list} is a comma-separated list of -% \meta{cmd}\texttt{=}\meta{key} pairs. \meta{option list} must -% include \texttt{variable}\texttt{=}\meta{cmd}, where \meta{cmd} -% is included in \meta{assign list}. The optional argument -% \meta{conditions} is the same as that for \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLpiechart} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLpiechart}[4][\boolean{true}]{% -{\let\DTLpievariable=\relax -\setkeys{datapie}{#2}% -\ifx\DTLpievariable\relax - \PackageError{datapie}{\string\DTLpiechart\space missing variable}{}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the total. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@total{0}% -\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{% -\let\dtl@oldtotal=\dtl@total -\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter - {\DTLpievariable}{\dtl@variable}% -\FPadd{\dtl@total}{\dtl@variable}{\dtl@total}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the angles -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter - {\DTLstartangle}{\@dtl@start}% -\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{% -\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter - {\DTLpievariable}{\dtl@variable}% -\dtl@computeangles{% -\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname}{% -\dtl@variable}% -\expandafter\@dtl@seg\expandafter= -\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname% -\FPmul{\dtl@tmp}{\dtl@variable}{100}% -\let\dtl@old=\dtl@tmp -\FPdiv{\dtl@tmp}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@total}% -\expandafter\FPround -\csname dtl@piepercent@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname\dtl@tmp -\c@DTLpieroundvar -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the offsets for each cut away segment -% \begin{macrocode} -\@for\dtl@row:=\dtl@piecutaways\do{% -\expandafter\@dtl@set@off\dtl@row-\relax -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the starting angle -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\dtl@start=\DTLstartangle -% \end{macrocode} -% Do the pie chart -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{tikzpicture} -\DTLpieatbegintikz -\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Store the segment number in \cs{@dtl@seg} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\@dtl@seg\expandafter= -\csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the start angle. -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\dtl@start{\csname dtl@sang@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the extent -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\dtl@extent{\csname dtl@angle@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the end angle -% \begin{macrocode} -\FPadd{\dtl@endangle}{\dtl@start}{\dtl@extent}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the shift. -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\dtl@angle{\csname dtl@cut@angle@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname}% -\let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle -\dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@angle -\ifnum\dtl@angle>180 - \FPsub{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{360}% - \dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@angle -\fi -\edef\dtl@cutlen{% -\csname dtl@cut@len@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname} -\edef\@dtl@shift{(\dtl@angle:\dtl@cutlen)}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the mid way angle. -% \begin{macrocode} -\FPmul{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@extent}{0.5}% -\FPadd{\dtl@midangle}{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@start}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw the segment. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{scope}[shift={\@dtl@shift}]% -\dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@start -\dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@endangle -\fill[color=\DTLgetpiesegmentcolor\@dtl@seg] (0,0) -- -(\dtl@start:\DTLradius) -arc (\dtl@start:\dtl@endangle:\DTLradius) -- cycle; -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw the outline if required: -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifdim\DTLpieoutlinewidth>0pt\relax -\draw[color=\DTLpieoutlinecolor,line width=\DTLpieoutlinewidth] -(0,0) -- (\dtl@start:\DTLradius) -arc (\dtl@start:\dtl@endangle:\DTLradius) -- cycle; -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Convert decimal to an integer -% \begin{macrocode} -\dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@midangle -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine whether to rotate inner labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLrotateinner -% \end{macrocode} -% If the mid way angle is between 90 and 270, the text will look -% upside-down, so adjust accordingly. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle > 90 \and \dtl@midangle < 270\) -\TE@or \dtl@midangle < -90}{% - \FPsub{\dtl@labelangle}{\dtl@midangle}{180}% - \dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@labelangle - \edef\dtl@innernodeopt{anchor=east,rotate=\dtl@labelangle}% -}{% - \edef\dtl@innernodeopt{anchor=west,rotate=\dtl@midangle}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't rotate inner labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \edef\dtl@innernodeopt{anchor=center}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine whether to rotate outer labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLrotateouter -% \end{macrocode} -% If the mid way angle is between 90 and 270, the text will look -% upside-down, so adjust accordingly. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle > 90 \and \dtl@midangle < 270\) -\TE@or \dtl@midangle < -90}{% - \FPsub{\dtl@labelangle}{\dtl@midangle}{180}% - \dtl@truncatedecimal\dtl@labelangle - \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=east,rotate=\dtl@labelangle}% -}{% - \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=west,rotate=\dtl@midangle}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Don't rotate outer labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\else - \ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle<45\and\dtl@midangle>-45\) - \TE@or \dtl@midangle=45 - \TE@or \dtl@midangle>315}{% - % east quadrant - \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=west}% - }{% - \ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle<135\and\dtl@midangle>45\) - \TE@or \dtl@midangle=135}{% - % north quadrant - \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=south}% - }{% - \ifthenelse{\(\dtl@midangle<225\and\dtl@midangle>135\) - \TE@or \dtl@midangle=225 - \TE@or \dtl@midangle=-135 - \TE@or \dtl@midangle<-135}{% - % west quadrant - \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=east}% - }{% - \edef\dtl@outernodeopt{anchor=north}% - }% - } - } -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw inner and outer labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\@dtl@dolabel{% -\noexpand\draw (\dtl@midangle:\the\dtl@inneroffset) -node[\dtl@innernodeopt]{% -\noexpand\DTLdisplayinnerlabel{\noexpand\dtl@innerlabel}};}% -\@dtl@dolabel -\edef\@dtl@dolabel{% -\noexpand\draw (\dtl@midangle:\the\dtl@outeroffset) -node[\dtl@outernodeopt]{% -\noexpand\DTLdisplayouterlabel{\noexpand\dtl@outerlabel}};}% -\@dtl@dolabel -\end{scope} -}% -\DTLpieatendtikz -\end{tikzpicture} -\fi -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@computeangles}\marg{n}\marg{variable} -%\end{definition} -% Compute the angles for segment \meta{n}. This sets -% \cs{dtl@sang@}\meta{n} (start angle), -% \cs{dtl@angle@}\meta{n} (extent angle), -% \cs{dtl@cut@angle@}\meta{n} (cut away angle) and -% \cs{dtl@cut@len@}\meta{n} (cut away length). -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@computeangles} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@computeangles}[2]{% -\FPifgt{\@dtl@start}{180}% -% if startangle > 180 - \let\dtl@old=\@dtl@start -% startangle = startangle - 360 - \FPsub{\@dtl@start}{\dtl@old}{360}% -\fi -\FPiflt{\@dtl@start}{-180}% -% if startangle < -180 - \let\dtl@old=\@dtl@start -% startangle = startangle + 360 - \FPadd{\@dtl@start}{\dtl@old}{360}% -\fi -\expandafter\edef\csname dtl@sang@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{% -\@dtl@start}% -\FPmul{\dtl@angle}{360}{#2}% -\let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle -\FPdiv{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@total}% -\expandafter\let\csname dtl@angle@\romannumeral#1\endcsname=\dtl@angle -\let\dtl@old=\@dtl@start -\FPadd{\@dtl@start}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@angle}% -\expandafter\def\csname dtl@cut@angle@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{0}% -\expandafter\def\csname dtl@cut@len@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{0cm}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Set the offset angles. -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@set@off} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@set@off#1-#2\relax{% -\ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{}}{% -\@@dtl@set@off{#1}}{% -\@@dtl@set@offr#1-#2\relax}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Set offset for individual segment: -%\begin{macro}{\@@dtl@set@off} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\@@dtl@set@off}[1]{% -\edef\dtl@old{\csname dtl@angle@\romannumeral#1\endcsname}% -\FPmul{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{0.5}% -\let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle -\edef\dtl@sang{\csname dtl@sang@\romannumeral#1\endcsname}% -\FPadd{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@sang}% -\expandafter\edef\csname dtl@cut@angle@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{% -\dtl@angle}% -\expandafter\edef\csname dtl@cut@len@\romannumeral#1\endcsname{% - \the\dtl@cutawayoffset} -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Define count register to keep track of segments -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@seg} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\@dtl@seg -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Set offset for a range of segments -%\begin{macro}{\@@dtl@setoffr} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@dtl@set@offr#1-#2-\relax{% -\ifnum#1>#2\relax - \PackageError{datapie}{Segment ranges must go in ascending order}{% -Try #2-#1 instead of #1-#2}% -\else - \def\dtl@angle{0}% - \@dtl@seg=#1\relax - \whiledo{\not\(\@dtl@seg > #2\)}{% - \let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle - \edef\dtl@segang{\csname dtl@angle@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname}% - \FPadd{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@segang}% - \advance\@dtl@seg by 1\relax - }% - \let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle - \FPmul{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{0.5}% - \edef\dtl@sang{\csname dtl@sang@\romannumeral#1\endcsname}% - \let\dtl@old=\dtl@angle - \FPadd{\dtl@angle}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@sang}% - \@dtl@seg=#1\relax - \whiledo{\not\(\@dtl@seg > #2\)}{% - \expandafter - \let\csname dtl@cut@angle@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname - =\dtl@angle - \expandafter - \edef\csname dtl@cut@len@\romannumeral\@dtl@seg\endcsname{% - \the\dtl@cutawayoffset} - \advance\@dtl@seg by 1\relax - }% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%</datapie.sty> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*dataplot.sty> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -%\section{dataplot.sty} -% Declare package: -% \begin{macrocode} -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{dataplot}[2007/07/23 v1.0 (NLCT)] -% \end{macrocode} -% Required packages -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{xkeyval} -\RequirePackage{tikz} -\RequirePackage{datatool} -% \end{macrocode} -% Load TikZ plot libraries -% \begin{macrocode} -\usetikzlibrary{plotmarks} -\usetikzlibrary{plothandlers} -% \end{macrocode} -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplotstream}\oarg{condition}\marg{db name}\marg{x key}\marg{y key} -%\end{definition} -% Add points to a stream from the database called \meta{db name} -% where the $x$ co-ordinates are given by the key \meta{x key} -% and the $y$ co-ordinates are given by the key \meta{y key}. -% The optional argument \meta{condition} is the same as that -% for \cs{DTLforeach} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotstream} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLplotstream}[4][\boolean{true}]{% -\DTLforeach[#1]{#2}{\dtl@x=#3,\dtl@y=#4}{% -\DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@x}{\dtl@decx}% -\DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@y}{\dtl@decy}% -\pgfplotstreampoint{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@decx}{\dtl@decy}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{DTLplotmarks} contains a list of plot marks used by -%\cs{DTLplot}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotmarks} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLplotmarks}{% -\pgfuseplotmark{o},% -\pgfuseplotmark{x},% -\pgfuseplotmark{+},% -\pgfuseplotmark{square},% -\pgfuseplotmark{triangle},% -\pgfuseplotmark{diamond},% -\pgfuseplotmark{pentagon},% -\pgfuseplotmark{asterisk},% -\pgfuseplotmark{star}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{DTLplotmarkcolors} contains a list of the plot mark colours. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotmarkcolors} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLplotmarkcolors}{% -red,% -green,% -blue,% -yellow,% -magenta,% -cyan,% -orange,% -black,% -gray} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\cs{DTLplotlines} contains a list of dash patterns used by -%\cs{DLTplot}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotlines} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLplotlines}{% -\pgfsetdash{}{{0pt}},% solid line -\pgfsetdash{{10pt}{5pt}}{0pt},% -\pgfsetdash{{5pt}{5pt}}{0pt},% -\pgfsetdash{{1pt}{5pt}}{0pt},% -\pgfsetdash{{5pt}{5pt}{1pt}{5pt}}{0pt},% -\pgfsetdash{{1pt}{3pt}}{0pt},% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\cs{DTLplotlinecolors} contains a list of the plot line colours. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotlinecolors} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLplotlinecolors}{% -red,% -green,% -blue,% -yellow,% -magenta,% -cyan,% -orange,% -black,% -gray} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% The default total plot width is stored in the length -% \cs{dtlplotwidth} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotwidth} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLplotwidth -\setlength\DTLplotwidth{4in} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% The default total plot height is stored in the length -% \cs{dtlplotheight} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotheight} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLplotheight -\setlength\DTLplotheight{4in} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% The length of the tick marks is given by -%\begin{macro}{\DTLticklength} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLticklength -\setlength\DTLticklength{5pt} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The length of the minor tick marks is given by -%\begin{macro}{\DTLminorticklength} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLminorticklength -\setlength\DTLminorticklength{2pt} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The offset from the axis to the tick label is given by -%\begin{macro}{\DTLticklabeloffset} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLticklabeloffset -\setlength\DTLticklabeloffset{8pt} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Length to store the height of the $x$ tick labels -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@xticlabelheight} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\dtl@xticlabelheight -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Length to store the width of the $y$ tick labels -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@yticlabelwidth} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\dtl@yticlabelwidth -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Suggested minimum distance between tick marks where the gap -% is not specified. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmintickgap} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLmintickgap -\setlength\DTLmintickgap{20pt} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Suggested minimum distance between minor tick marks where the gap -% is not specified. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLminminortickgap} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLminminortickgap -\setlength\DTLminminortickgap{5pt} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Round $x$ tick labels to the number of digits given by -% the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundXvar}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{DTLplotroundXvar} -\setcounter{DTLplotroundXvar}{2} -% \end{macrocode} -% Round $y$ tick labels to the number of digits given by -% the counter \counterfmt{DTLplotroundYvar}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{DTLplotroundYvar} -\setcounter{DTLplotroundYvar}{2} -% \end{macrocode} -% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $x$ axis -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLxaxis} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLxaxis -\DTLxaxistrue -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The style of the $x$ axis is just a solid line by default -%\begin{macro}{\DTLXAxisStyle} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLXAxisStyle}{-} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $y$ axis -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLyaxis} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLyaxis -\DTLyaxistrue -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The style of the $y$ axis is just a solid line by default -%\begin{macro}{\DTLYAxisStyle} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLYAxisStyle}{-} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The style of the major grid lines: -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmajorgridstyle} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLmajorgridstyle}{color=gray,-} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The style of the minor grid lines: -%\begin{macro}{\DTLminorgridstyle} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLminorgridstyle}{color=gray,loosely dotted} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Conditional to determine whether the $x$ tics should point in or -% out. -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLxticsin} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLxticsin -\DTLxticsintrue -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Conditional to determine whether the $y$ tics should point in or -% out. -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLyticsin} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLyticsin -\DTLyticsintrue -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Count register to determine the legend setting. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@legendsetting} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\dtl@legendsetting -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Gap between border of plot and legend is given by the -% lengths \cs{DTLlegendxoffset} and \cs{DTLlegendyoffset} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLlegendxoffset} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLlegendxoffset -\setlength\DTLlegendxoffset{10pt} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\begin{macro}{\DTLlegendyoffset} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLlegendyoffset -\setlength\DTLlegendyoffset{10pt} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Macro to display the legend: -%\begin{macro}{\DTLformatlegend} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLformatlegend}[1]{% -\setlength{\fboxrule}{1.1pt}% -\fcolorbox{black}{white}{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Conditional to specify whether or not to use markers -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLshowmarkers} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLshowmarkers -\DTLshowmarkerstrue -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Conditional to specify whether or not to use lines -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLshowlines} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLshowlines -\DTLshowlinesfalse -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Hook to insert stuff at the start of the \env{tikzpicture} -% environment (after the unit vectors have been set). -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotatbegintikz} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLplotatbegintikz}{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Hook to insert stuff at the end of the \env{tikzpicture} -% environment. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplotatendtikz} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLplotatendtikz}{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Plot settings. The database key for the $x$ value is -% given by the "x" setting: -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{x}{% -\def\dtl@xkey{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The database key for the $y$ value is given by the "y" setting: -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{y}{% -\def\dtl@ykey{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The list of plot mark colours is given by the "markcolors" setting. -% (This should be a comma separated list of colour names.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{markcolors}{% -\def\DTLplotmarkcolors{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The list of plot line colours is given by the "linecolors" setting. -% (This should be a comma separated list of colour names.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{linecolors}{% -\def\DTLplotlinecolors{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The list of plot mark and line colours is given by the "colors" -% setting. (This should be a comma separated list of colour names.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{colors}{% -\def\DTLplotmarkcolors{#1}% -\def\DTLplotlinecolors{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The list of plot marks is given by the "marks" setting. (This -% should be a comma separated list of code that generates -% pgf plot marks.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{marks}{% -\def\DTLplotmarks{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The list of plot line styles is given by the "lines" setting. (This -% should be a comma separated list of code that sets the line -% style.) An empty set will create solid lines. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{lines}{% -\def\DTLplotlines{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The total width of the plot is given by the "width" setting. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{width}{% -\setlength\DTLplotwidth{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% The total height of the plot is given by the "height" setting. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{height}{% -\setlength\DTLplotheight{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine whether to show lines, markers or both -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@choicekey{dataplot}{style}[\val\nr]{both,lines,markers}{% -\ifcase\nr\relax - \DTLshowlinestrue - \DTLshowmarkerstrue -\or - \DTLshowlinestrue - \DTLshowmarkersfalse -\or - \DTLshowmarkerstrue - \DTLshowlinesfalse -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine whether or not to display the axes -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@choicekey{dataplot}{axes}[\val\nr]{both,x,y,none}[both]{% -\ifcase\nr\relax - % both - \DTLxaxistrue - \DTLxticstrue - \DTLyaxistrue - \DTLyticstrue -\or % x - \DTLxaxistrue - \DTLxticstrue - \DTLyaxisfalse - \DTLyticsfalse -\or % y - \DTLxaxisfalse - \DTLxticsfalse - \DTLyaxistrue - \DTLyticstrue -\or % none - \DTLxaxisfalse - \DTLxticsfalse - \DTLyaxisfalse - \DTLyticsfalse -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Enclose plot in a box -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{box}[true]{} -\DTLboxfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% Condition to determine whether to show the $x$ tick marks -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{xtics}[true]{} -\DTLxticstrue -% \end{macrocode} -% Condition to determine whether to show the $y$ tick marks -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{ytics}[true]{} -\DTLyticstrue -% \end{macrocode} -% Condition to determine whether to show the $x$ minor tick marks -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{xminortics}[true]{% -\ifDTLxminortics \DTLxticstrue\fi} -\DTLxminorticsfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% Condition to determine whether to show the $y$ minor tick marks -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{yminortics}[true]{% -\ifDTLyminortics \DTLyticstrue\fi} -\DTLyminorticsfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine whether to draw the grid -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{dataplot}[DTL]{grid}[true]{} -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine whether the $x$ tick marks should point -% in or out -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@choicekey{dataplot}{xticdir}[\val\nr]{in,out}{% -\ifcase\nr\relax - \DTLxticsintrue -\or - \DTLxticsinfalse -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine whether the $y$ tick marks should point -% in or out -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@choicekey{dataplot}{yticdir}[\val\nr]{in,out}{% -\ifcase\nr\relax - \DTLyticsintrue -\or - \DTLyticsinfalse -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine whether the $x$ and $y$ tick marks should point -% in or out -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@choicekey{dataplot}{ticdir}[\val\nr]{in,out}{% -\ifcase\nr\relax - \DTLxticsintrue - \DTLyticsintrue -\or - \DTLxticsinfalse - \DTLyticsinfalse -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the bounds of the graph (value must be in the form -% \meta{min x}","\meta{min y}","\meta{max x}","\meta{max y} -% (bounds overrides minx, miny, maxx and maxy settings.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{bounds}{% -\def\dtl@bounds{#1}} -\let\dtl@bounds=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Set only the lower $x$ bound -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{minx}{% -\def\dtl@minx{#1}} -\let\dtl@minx=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Set only the upper $x$ bound: -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{maxx}{% -\def\dtl@maxx{#1}} -\let\dtl@maxx=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Set only the lower $y$ bound: -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{miny}{% -\def\dtl@miny{#1}} -\let\dtl@miny=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Set only the upper $y$ bound: -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{maxy}{% -\def\dtl@maxy{#1}} -\let\dtl@maxy=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define list of points for $x$ ticks. (Must be a comma separated -% list of decimal numbers.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{xticpoints}{% -\def\dtl@xticlist{#1}\DTLxticstrue\DTLxaxistrue} -\let\dtl@xticlist=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define list of points for $y$ ticks. (Must be a comma separated -% list of decimal numbers.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{yticpoints}{% -\def\dtl@yticlist{#1}\DTLyticstrue\DTLyaxistrue} -\let\dtl@yticlist=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define a the gap between $x$ tick marks (xticpoints overrides -% xticgap) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{xticgap}{\def\dtl@xticgap{#1}% -\DTLxticstrue\DTLxaxistrue} -\let\dtl@xticgap=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define a the gap between $y$ tick marks (yticpoints overrides -% yticgap) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{yticgap}{\def\dtl@yticgap{#1}% -\DTLyticstrue\DTLyaxistrue} -\let\dtl@yticgap=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define comma separated list of labels for $x$ ticks. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{xticlabels}{% -\def\dtl@xticlabels{#1}\DTLxticstrue\DTLxaxistrue} -\let\dtl@xticlabels=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define comma separated list of labels for $y$ ticks. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{yticlabels}{% -\def\dtl@yticlabels{#1}\DTLyticstrue\DTLyaxistrue} -\let\dtl@yticlabels=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define $x$ axis label -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{xlabel}{% -\def\dtl@xlabel{#1}} -\let\dtl@xlabel=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define $y$ axis label -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{ylabel}{% -\def\dtl@ylabel{#1}} -\let\dtl@ylabel=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% The legend setting may be one of: "none" (don't show it), -% "north", "northeast", "east", "southeast", "south", "southwest", -% "west", or "northwest". These set the count register -% \cs{dtl@legendsetting}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@choicekey{dataplot}{legend}[\val\nr]{none,north,northeast,% -east,southeast,south,southwest,west,northwest}[northeast]{% -\dtl@legendsetting=\nr\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Legend labels (comma separated list). If omitted, the database -% name is used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{dataplot}{legendlabels}{\def\dtl@legendlabels{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Temporary length: -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@tmplength} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\dtl@tmplength -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLplot}\oarg{condition}\marg{db list}\marg{settings} -%\end{definition} -% Creates a plot (inside a \env{tikzpicture} environment) of all -% the data given in the databases listed in \meta{db list}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLplot} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLplot}[3][\boolean{true}]{{% -\let\dtl@xkey=\relax -\let\dtl@ykey=\relax -\let\dtl@legendlabels=\relax -\setkeys{dataplot}{#3}% -\let\dtl@plotmarklist=\DTLplotmarks -\let\dtl@plotlinelist=\DTLplotlines -\let\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist=\DTLplotmarkcolors -\let\dtl@plotlinecolorlist=\DTLplotlinecolors -\def\dtl@legend{}% -\ifx\dtl@legendlabels\relax - \edef\dtl@legendlabels{#2}% -\fi -\ifx\dtl@xkey\relax - \PackageError{dataplot}{Missing x setting for - \string\DTLplot}{}% -\else - \ifx\dtl@ykey\relax - \PackageError{dataplot}{Missing y setting for - \string\DTLplot}{}% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% If user didn't specified bounds, -% compute the maximum and minimum $x$ and $y$ values over -% all the databases listed. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@bounds\relax - \DTLcomputebounds[#1]{#2}{\dtl@xkey}{\dtl@ykey} - {\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLmaxY}% - \ifx\dtl@minx\relax - \else - \let\DTLminX=\dtl@minx - \fi - \ifx\dtl@maxx\relax - \else - \let\DTLmaxX=\dtl@maxx - \fi - \ifx\dtl@miny\relax - \else - \let\DTLminY=\dtl@miny - \fi - \ifx\dtl@maxy\relax - \else - \let\DTLmaxY=\dtl@maxy - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Otherwise extract information from \cs{dtl@bounds} -% \begin{macrocode} - \else - \expandafter\dtl@getbounds\dtl@bounds\@nil - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine scaling factors. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@dtl@tmpcount=\DTLplotwidth - \FPsub{\dtl@dx}{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLminX}% - \FPdiv{\dtl@unit@x}{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}{\dtl@dx}% - \@dtl@tmpcount=\DTLplotheight - \FPsub{\dtl@dy}{\DTLmaxY}{\DTLminY}% - \FPdiv{\dtl@unit@y}{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}{\dtl@dy}% -% \end{macrocode} -% If x tics specified, construct a list of x tic points if not -% already specified. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLxtics - \ifx\dtl@xticlist\relax - \ifx\dtl@xticgap\relax - \dtl@constructticklist\DTLminX\DTLmaxX - \dtl@unit@x\dtl@xticlist - \else - \DTLifFPopenbetween{0}{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxX}{% - \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz - \DTLminX\DTLmaxX\dtl@xticlist\dtl@xticgap}{% - \dtl@constructticklistwithgap - \DTLminX\DTLmaxX\dtl@xticlist\dtl@xticgap}% - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Construct a list of $x$ minor tick points if required -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\dtl@xminorticlist\@empty - \ifDTLxminortics - \let\dtl@prevtick=\relax - \@for\dtl@nexttick:=\dtl@xticlist\do{% - \ifx\dtl@prevtick\relax - \else - \dtl@constructminorticklist - \dtl@prevtick\dtl@nexttick\dtl@unit@x\dtl@xminorticlist - \fi - \let\dtl@prevtick=\dtl@nexttick - }% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine the height of the $x$ tick labels. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@xticlabels\relax - \settoheight{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{\dtl@xticlist}% - \else - \settoheight{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{\dtl@xticlabels}% - \fi - \else - \setlength{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{0pt}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% If y tics specified, construct a list of y tic points if not -% already specified. -% \begin{macrocode} - \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{0pt}% - \ifDTLytics - \ifx\dtl@yticlist\relax - \ifx\dtl@yticgap\relax - \dtl@constructticklist\DTLminY\DTLmaxY - \dtl@unit@y\dtl@yticlist - \else - \DTLifFPopenbetween{0}{\DTLminY}{\DTLmaxY}{% - \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz - \DTLminY\DTLmaxY\dtl@yticlist\dtl@yticgap}{% - \dtl@constructticklistwithgap - \DTLminY\DTLmaxY\dtl@yticlist\dtl@yticgap}% - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Construct a list of $y$ minor tick points if required -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\dtl@yminorticlist\@empty - \ifDTLyminortics - \let\dtl@prevtick=\relax - \@for\dtl@nexttick:=\dtl@yticlist\do{% - \ifx\dtl@prevtick\relax - \else - \dtl@constructminorticklist - \dtl@prevtick\dtl@nexttick\dtl@unit@y\dtl@yminorticlist - \fi - \let\dtl@prevtick=\dtl@nexttick - }% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine the width of the $y$ tick labels. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@ylabel\relax - \else - \ifx\dtl@yticlabels\relax - \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtl@yticlist\do{% - \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thislabel} - {\c@DTLplotroundYvar}% - \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{\dtl@thislabel}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth - \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}% - \fi - }% - \else - \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtl@yticlabels\do{% - \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{\dtl@thislabel}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth - \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}% - \fi - }% - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Start the picture. -% \begin{macrocode} - \begin{tikzpicture} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the $x$ and $y$ unit vectors. -% \begin{macrocode} - \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\dtl@unit@x sp}{0pt}}% - \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\dtl@unit@y sp}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Add any extra information the user requires -% \begin{macrocode} - \DTLplotatbegintikz -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine whether to put a box around the plot -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLbox - \draw (\DTLminX,\DTLminY) -- (\DTLmaxX,\DTLminY) -- - (\DTLmaxX,\DTLmaxY) -- (\DTLminX,\DTLmaxY) -- - cycle; - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot $x$ axis if required. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLxaxis - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLXAxisStyle] - (\DTLminX,\DTLminY) -- (\DTLmaxX,\DTLminY); - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot $y$ axis if required. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLyaxis - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLYAxisStyle] - (\DTLminX,\DTLminY) -- (\DTLminX,\DTLmaxY); - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot grid if required -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLgrid - \ifDTLxminortics - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@xminorticlist\do{% - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLminorgridstyle] - (\dtl@thistick,\DTLminY) -- (\dtl@thistick,\DTLmaxY); - }% - \fi - \ifDTLyminortics - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@yminorticlist\do{% - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLminorgridstyle] - (\DTLminX,\dtl@thistick) -- (\DTLmaxX,\dtl@thistick); - }% - \fi - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@xticlist\do{% - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLmajorgridstyle] - (\dtl@thistick,\DTLminY) -- (\dtl@thistick,\DTLmaxY); - }% - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@yticlist\do{% - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLmajorgridstyle] - (\DTLminX,\dtl@thistick) -- (\DTLmaxX,\dtl@thistick); - }% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot $x$ tics if required. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLxtics - \addtolength\dtl@xticlabelheight{\DTLticklabeloffset}% - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@xticlist\do{% - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}} - \ifDTLxticsin - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLticklength}}} - \else - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLticklength}}} - \fi - \ifDTLbox - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}} - \ifDTLxticsin - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLticklength}}} - \else - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLticklength}}} - \fi - \fi - \pgfusepath{stroke}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot the tick labels -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@xticlabels\relax - \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thistick} - {\c@DTLplotroundXvar}% - \else - \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@xticlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest - \let\dtl@xticlabels=\dtl@rest - \fi - \pgftext[base,center,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\dtl@xticlabelheight}}}] - {\dtl@thislabel} - }% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot $x$ label if required. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@xlabel\relax - \else - \addtolength{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{\baselineskip}% - \setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{0.5\DTLplotwidth} - \pgftext[base,center,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}}% - {\pgfpoint{\dtl@tmplength}{-\dtl@xticlabelheight}}}]{% - \dtl@xlabel} - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot the $x$ minor ticks if required -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLxminortics - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@xminorticlist\do{% - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}} - \ifDTLxticsin - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLminorticklength}}} - \else - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLminorticklength}}} - \fi - \ifDTLbox - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}} - \ifDTLxticsin - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLminorticklength}}} - \else - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLmaxY}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLminorticklength}}} - \fi - \fi - }% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot $y$ tics if required. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLytics - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@yticlist\do{% - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}} - \ifDTLyticsin - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{\DTLticklength}{0pt}}} - \else - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklength}{0pt}}} - \fi - \ifDTLbox - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}} - \ifDTLyticsin - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklength}{0pt}}} - \else - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{\DTLticklength}{0pt}}} - \fi - \fi - \pgfusepath{stroke} -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot the $y$ tick labels if required -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@yticlabels\relax - \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thistick} - {\c@DTLplotroundYvar}% - \else - \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@yticlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest - \let\dtl@yticlabels=\dtl@rest - \fi - \pgftext[right,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklabeloffset}{0pt}}}] - {\dtl@thislabel} - }% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot $y$ label if required. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@ylabel\relax - \else - \addtolength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\baselineskip}% - \setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{0.5\DTLplotheight} - \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}}% - {\pgfpoint{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}}}, - rotate=90]{% - \dtl@ylabel} - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot the $y$ minor ticks if required -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLyminortics - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtl@yminorticlist\do{% - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}} - \ifDTLyticsin - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{\DTLminorticklength}{0pt}}} - \else - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLminorticklength}{0pt}}} - \fi - \ifDTLbox - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}} - \ifDTLyticsin - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLminorticklength}{0pt}}} - \else - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{\DTLminorticklength}{0pt}}} - \fi - \fi - \pgfusepath{stroke} - }% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Iterate through each database -% \begin{macrocode} - \@for\dtl@thisdb:=#2\do{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Get the current plot mark colour. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist\@empty - \let\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist=\DTLplotmarkcolors - \fi - \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist\dtl@thisplotmarkcolor - \dtl@remainder - \let\dtl@plotmarkcolorlist=\dtl@remainder -% \end{macrocode} -% Get the current plot mark, and store in \cs{dtl@mark} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLshowmarkers - \ifx\dtl@plotmarklist\@empty - \let\dtl@plotmarklist=\DTLplotmarks - \fi - \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@plotmarklist\dtl@thisplotmark - \dtl@remainder - \let\dtl@plotmarklist=\dtl@remainder - \ifx\dtl@thisplotmark\relax - \let\dtl@mark=\relax - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@thisplotmark}% - \ifx\dtl@thisplotmarkcolor\@empty - \edef\dtl@mark{\the\toks@}% - \else - \edef\dtl@mark{% - \noexpand\color{\dtl@thisplotmarkcolor}% - \the\toks@}% - \fi - \fi - \else - \let\dtl@mark=\relax - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Get the current plot line colour. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@plotlinecolorlist\@empty - \let\dtl@plotlinecolorlist=\DTLplotlinecolors - \fi - \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@plotlinecolorlist\dtl@thisplotlinecolor - \dtl@remainder - \let\dtl@plotlinecolorlist=\dtl@remainder -% \end{macrocode} -% Get the current line style, and store in \cs{dtl@linestyle} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTLshowlines - \ifx\dtl@plotlinelist\@empty - \let\dtl@plotlinelist=\DTLplotlines - \fi - \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@plotlinelist\dtl@thisplotline - \dtl@remainder - \let\dtl@plotlinelist=\dtl@remainder - \expandafter\ifx\dtl@thisplotline\relax - \let\dtl@linestyle=\relax - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@thisplotline}% - \ifx\dtl@thisplotlinecolor\@empty - \edef\dtl@linestyle{\the\toks@}% - \else - \edef\dtl@linestyle{% - \noexpand\color{\dtl@thisplotlinecolor}% - \the\toks@}% - \fi - \fi - \else - \let\dtl@linestyle=\relax - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Append this plot setting to the legend. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifnum\dtl@legendsetting>0\relax - \dtl@chopfirst\dtl@legendlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest - \let\dtl@legendlabels=\dtl@rest - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@mark}% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@linestyle}% - \edef\dtl@addtolegend{\noexpand\DTLaddtoplotlegend - {\the\toks@}{\the\@dtl@toks}{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \dtl@addtolegend - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Store stream in \cs{dtl@stream} -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\dtl@stream{\pgfplotstreamstart}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Only plot points that lie inside bounds. -% \begin{macrocode} - \DTLforeach[#1]{\dtl@thisdb}{\dtl@x=\dtl@xkey,% - \dtl@y=\dtl@ykey}{% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@x}{\dtl@decx}% - \DTLconverttodecimal{\dtl@y}{\dtl@decy}% - \ifthenelse{% - \DTLisclosedbetween{\dtl@x}{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxX}% - \and - \DTLisclosedbetween{\dtl@y}{\DTLminY}{\DTLmaxY}% - }{% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@stream}% - \edef\dtl@stream{\the\toks@ - \noexpand\pgfplotstreampoint - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@decx}{\dtl@decy}}}% - }{}% - }% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@stream}% - \edef\dtl@stream{\the\toks@\noexpand\pgfplotstreamend}% -% \end{macrocode} -% End plot stream and draw path. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\dtl@linestyle\relax - \else - \begin{scope} - \dtl@linestyle - \pgfplothandlerlineto - \dtl@stream - \pgfusepath{stroke} - \end{scope} - \fi - \ifx\dtl@mark\relax - \else - \begin{scope} - \pgfplothandlermark{\dtl@mark}% - \dtl@stream - \pgfusepath{stroke} - \end{scope} - \fi - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot legend if required. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifcase\dtl@legendsetting - % none - \or % north - \pgftext[top,center,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxY}} - {\pgfpoint{0.5\DTLplotwidth}{-\DTLlegendyoffset}}}] - {\DTLformatlegend - {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}} - \or % north east - \pgftext[top,right,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLmaxY}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLlegendxoffset}{-\DTLlegendyoffset}}}] - {\DTLformatlegend - {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}} - \or % east - \pgftext[center,right,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLlegendxoffset}{0.5\DTLplotheight}}}] - {\DTLformatlegend - {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}} - \or % south east - \pgftext[bottom,right,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLmaxX}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLlegendxoffset}{\DTLlegendyoffset}}}] - {\DTLformatlegend - {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}} - \or % south - \pgftext[center,bottom,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{0.5\DTLplotwidth}{\DTLlegendyoffset}}}] - {\DTLformatlegend - {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}} - \or % south west - \pgftext[bottom,left,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{\DTLlegendxoffset}{\DTLlegendyoffset}}}] - {\DTLformatlegend - {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}} - \or % west - \pgftext[center,left,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLminY}} - {\pgfpoint{\DTLlegendxoffset}{0.5\DTLplotheight}}}] - {\DTLformatlegend - {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}} - \or % north west - \pgftext[top,left,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxY}} - {\pgfpoint{\DTLlegendxoffset}{-\DTLlegendyoffset}}}] - {\DTLformatlegend - {\begin{tabular}{cl}\dtl@legend\end{tabular}}} - \fi - \DTLplotatendtikz - \end{tikzpicture} - \fi - \fi -\fi -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Extract bounds: -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@getbounds} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dtl@getbounds#1,#2,#3,#4\@nil{% -\def\DTLminX{#1}% -\def\DTLminY{#2}% -\def\DTLmaxX{#3}% -\def\DTLmaxY{#4}% -\FPifgt{\DTLminX}{\DTLmaxX} - \PackageError{dataplot}{Min X > Max X in bounds #1,#2,#3,#4}{% - The bounds must be specified as minX,minY,maxX,maxY}% -\fi -\FPifgt{\DTLminY}{\DTLmaxY} - \PackageError{dataplot}{Min Y > Max Y in bounds #1,#2,#3,#4}{% - The bounds must be specified as minX,minY,maxX,maxY}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@constructticklist}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{scale factor}\marg{list} -%\end{definition} -% Construct a list of tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max} -% and store in \meta{list} (a control sequence.) -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructticklist} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@constructticklist}[4]{% -\DTLifFPopenbetween{0}{#1}{#2}{% - \FPsub{\@dtl@width}{0}{#1}% - \FPmul{\@dtl@width}{\@dtl@width}{#3}% - \FPdiv{\@dtl@neggap}{\@dtl@width}{10}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@neggap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap - \FPdiv{\@dtl@neggap}{\@dtl@width}{4}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@neggap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap - \FPdiv{\@dtl@neggap}{\@dtl@width}{2}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@neggap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap - \let\@dtl@neggap=\@dtl@width - \fi - \fi - \fi - \FPmul{\@dtl@width}{#2}{#3}% - \FPdiv{\@dtl@posgap}{\@dtl@width}{10}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@posgap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap - \FPdiv{\@dtl@posgap}{\@dtl@width}{4}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@posgap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap - \FPdiv{\@dtl@posgap}{\@dtl@width}{2}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@posgap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap - \let\@dtl@posgap=\@dtl@width - \fi - \fi - \fi - \FPmax{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@neggap}{\@dtl@posgap}% - \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@gap}{#3}% - \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz{#1}{#2}{#4}{\@dtl@gap}% -}{% - \FPsub{\@dtl@width}{#2}{#1}% - \FPmul{\@dtl@width}{\@dtl@width}{#3}% - \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{10}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap - \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{4}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap - \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{2}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLmintickgap - \let\@dtl@gap=\@dtl@width - \fi - \fi - \fi - \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@gap}{#3}% - \dtl@constructticklistwithgap{#1}{#2}{#4}{\@dtl@gap}% -}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@constructticklistwithgap}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{list}\marg{gap} -%\end{definition} -% Construct a list of tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max} -% and store in \meta{list} (a control sequence) using the gap given -% by \meta{gap} where the gap is given in user co-ordinates. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructticklistwithgap} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@constructticklistwithgap}[4]{% -\edef\@dtl@thistick{#1}% -\edef#3{#1}% -\FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}% -\whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\@dtl@thistick}{#1}{#2}}{% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thistick}% - \edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}% - \FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}% -}% -\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#2}% -\edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@constructticklistwithgapz}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{list}\marg{gap} -%\end{definition} -% Construct a list of tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max} -% and store in \meta{list} (a control sequence) using the gap given -% by \meta{gap} where the tick list straddles zero. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructticklistwithgapz} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@constructticklistwithgapz}[4]{% -\edef\@dtl@thistick{0}% -\edef#3{0}% -\FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}% -\whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\@dtl@thistick}{0}{#2}}{% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thistick}% - \edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}% - \FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}% -}% -\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#2}% -\edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}% -\FPifeq{#1}{0}% -\else -\edef\@dtl@thistick{0}% - \FPsub{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}% - \whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\@dtl@thistick}{#1}{0}}{% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thistick}% - \edef#3{\the\toks@,#3}% - \FPsub{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}% - }% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#1}% - \edef#3{\the\toks@,#3}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@constructminorticklist}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{scale factor}\marg{list} -%\end{definition} -% Construct a list of minor tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max} -% and append to \meta{list} (a control sequence.) -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructminorticklist} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@constructminorticklist}[4]{% - \FPsub{\@dtl@width}{#2}{#1}% - \FPmul{\@dtl@width}{\@dtl@width}{#3}% - \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{10}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLminminortickgap - \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{4}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLminminortickgap - \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@width}{2}% - \setlength\dtl@tmplength{\@dtl@gap sp}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength<\DTLminminortickgap - \let\@dtl@gap=\@dtl@width - \fi - \fi - \fi - \FPdiv{\@dtl@gap}{\@dtl@gap}{#3}% - \dtl@constructticklistwithgapex{#1}{#2}{\dtl@tmp}{\@dtl@gap}% - \ifx#4\@empty - \let#4=\dtl@tmp - \else - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{#4}% - \edef#4{#4,\dtl@tmp}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{dtl@constructticklistwithgapex}\marg{min}\marg{max}\marg{list}\marg{gap} -%\end{definition} -% Construct a list of tick points between \meta{min} and \meta{max} -% and store in \meta{list} (a control sequence) using the gap given -% by \meta{gap} where the gap is given in user co-ordinates. -% The end points are excluded from the list. -%\begin{macro}{\dtl@constructticklistwithgapex} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\dtl@constructticklistwithgapex}[4]{% -\edef\@dtl@thistick{#1}% -\let#3=\@empty -\FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}% -\whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\@dtl@thistick}{#1}{#2}}{% - \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@dtl@thistick}% - \ifx#3\@empty - \edef#3{\the\toks@}% - \else - \edef#3{#3,\the\toks@}% - \fi - \FPadd{\@dtl@thistick}{\@dtl@thistick}{#4}% -}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLaddtoplotlegend}\marg{marker}\marg{line style}\marg{label} -%\end{definition} -% Add entry to legend. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLaddtoplotlegend} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLaddtoplotlegend}[3]{% -\def\dtl@legendline{}% -\ifx\relax#2\relax -\else - \toks@{#2% - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-10pt}{0pt}}% - \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{10pt}{0pt}}% - \pgfusepath{stroke}}% - \edef\dtl@legendline{\the\toks@}% -\fi -\ifx\relax#1\relax -\else - \toks@{#1}% - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@legendline}% - \edef\dtl@legendline{\the\@dtl@toks\the\toks@}% -\fi -\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\dtl@legendline}% -\ifx\dtl@legend\@empty - \edef\dtl@legend{\noexpand\tikz\the\toks@; \noexpand& #3}% -\else - \expandafter\@dtl@toks\expandafter{\dtl@legend}% - \edef\dtl@legend{\the\@dtl@toks\noexpand\\% - \noexpand\tikz\the\toks@; \noexpand& #3}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%</dataplot.sty> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*databar.sty> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -%\section{databar.sty} -% Declare package: -% \begin{macrocode} -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{databar}[2007/07/23 v1.0 (NLCT)] -% \end{macrocode} -% Require \sty{xkeyval} package -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{xkeyval} -% \end{macrocode} -% Require \sty{dataplot} package -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{dataplot} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define a conditional to determine whether to use colour or -% grey scale. -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLcolorbarchart} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLcolorbarchart -\DTLcolorbarcharttrue -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Package options to change the conditional: -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{color}{\DTLcolorbarcharttrue} -\DeclareOption{gray}{\DTLcolorbarchartfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -%\cs{DTLbarXlabelalign} specifies the alignment -% for the $x$ axis labels. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLbarXlabelalign}{left,rotate=-90} -% \end{macrocode} -%\cs{DTLbarYticklabelalign} specifies the alignment -% for the $x$ axis labels. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLbarYticklabelalign}{right} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define boolean keys to govern bar chart orientation. -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLverticalbars} -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@boolkey{databar}[DTL]{verticalbars}[true]{% -\ifDTLverticalbars - \def\DTLbarXlabelalign{left,rotate=-90}% - \def\DTLbarYticklabelalign{right} -\else - \def\DTLbarXlabelalign{right}% - \def\DTLbarYticklabelalign{center} -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Set defaults: -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLverticalbarstrue -% \end{macrocode} -% Package options to change \cs{ifDTLverticalbars} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{vertical}{\DTLverticalbarstrue - \def\DTLbarXlabelalign{left,rotate=-90}% - \def\DTLbarYticklabelalign{right} -} -\DeclareOption{horizontal}{\DTLverticalbarsfalse - \def\DTLbarXlabelalign{right}% - \def\DTLbarYticklabelalign{center} -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Process options: -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProcessOptions -% \end{macrocode} -% Required packages: -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{datatool} -\RequirePackage{tikz} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define some variables that govern the appearance of the bar -% chart. -% -% The total height of the bar chart -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbarchartlength} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLbarchartlength -\DTLbarchartlength=3in -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% The width of each bar -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbarwidth} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLbarwidth -\DTLbarwidth=1cm -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% The offset from the $x$ axis to the bar label -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbarlabeloffset} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLbarlabeloffset -\setlength\DTLbarlabeloffset{10pt} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The style of the $x$ axis -%\begin{macro}{\DTLBarXAxisStyle} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLBarXAxisStyle}{-} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% The style of the $y$ axis -%\begin{macro}{\DTLBarYAxisStyle} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLBarYAxisStyle}{-} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \counterfmt{DTLbarroundvar} is a counter governing the number of digits -% to round to when using \cs{FPround}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{DTLbarroundvar} -\setcounter{DTLbarroundvar}{1} -% \end{macrocode} -% -%\cs{DTLbardisplayYticklabel} governs how the $y$ tick labels appear. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLbardisplayYticklabel}[1]{#1} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\cs{DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel} governs how the lower bar labels appear. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel}[1]{#1} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\cs{DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel} governs how the lower multi bar labels appear. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel}[1]{#1} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\cs{DTLdisplayupperbarlabel} governs how the upper bar labels -% appear. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplayupperbarlabel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdisplayupperbarlabel}[1]{#1} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\cs{DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel} governs how the upper multi bar -% labels appear. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel}[1]{#1} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \cs{DTLbaratbegintikz} specifies any commands -% to apply at the start of the \env{tikzpicture} environment. -% By default it does nothing. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbaratbegintikz} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLbaratbegintikz}{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% \cs{DTLbaratendtikz} specifies any commands -% to apply at the end of the \env{tikzpicture} environment. -% By default it does nothing. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbaratendtikz} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLbaratendtikz}{} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $x$ -% axis -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLbarxaxis} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLbarxaxis -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $y$ -% axis -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLbaryaxis} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLbaryaxis -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% Conditional to determine whether or not to display the $y$ -% tick marks -%\begin{macro}{\ifDTLbarytics} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTLbarytics -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Define count register to store the current bar index: -%\begin{macro}{\@dtl@barcount} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\@dtl@barcount -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLsetbarcolor}\marg{n}\marg{color} -%\end{definition} -% Assign colour name \meta{color} to the \meta{n}th bar. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLsetbarcolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLsetbarcolor}[2]{% -\expandafter\def\csname dtlbar@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname{#2}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLgetbarcolor}\marg{n} -%\end{definition} -% Get the colour specification for the \meta{n}th bar -%\begin{macro}{\DTLgetbarcolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLgetbarcolor}[1]{% -\csname dtlbar@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -%\cs{DTLdobarcolor}\marg{n} -%\end{definition} -% Set the colour to that for the \meta{n}th bar -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdobarcolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdobarcolor}[1]{% -\expandafter\color\expandafter -{\csname dtlbar@segcol\romannumeral#1\endcsname}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{DTLdocurrentbarcolor} -% sets the colour to that of the current bar. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLdocurrentbarcolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLdocurrentbarcolor}{% -\ifnum\dtlforeachlevel=0\relax - \PackageError{databar}{Can't use - \string\DTLdocurrentbarcolor\space outside - \string\DTLbarchart}{}% -\else - \expandafter\DTLdobarcolor\expandafter{% - \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname}% -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{DTLbaroutlinecolor} specifies what colour to draw the -% outline. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbaroutlinecolor} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLbaroutlinecolor}{black} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\cs{DTLbaroutlinewidth} specifies the line width of the outline: -% Outline is only drawn if the linewidth is greater than 0pt. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbaroutlinewidth} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\DTLbaroutlinewidth -\DTLbaroutlinewidth=0pt -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -% Set the default colours. If there are more than eight bars, -% more colours will need to be defined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLcolorbarchart - \DTLsetbarcolor{1}{red} - \DTLsetbarcolor{2}{green} - \DTLsetbarcolor{3}{blue} - \DTLsetbarcolor{4}{yellow} - \DTLsetbarcolor{5}{magenta} - \DTLsetbarcolor{6}{cyan} - \DTLsetbarcolor{7}{orange} - \DTLsetbarcolor{8}{white} -\else - \DTLsetbarcolor{1}{black!15} - \DTLsetbarcolor{2}{black!25} - \DTLsetbarcolor{3}{black!35} - \DTLsetbarcolor{4}{black!45} - \DTLsetbarcolor{5}{black!55} - \DTLsetbarcolor{6}{black!65} - \DTLsetbarcolor{7}{black!75} - \DTLsetbarcolor{8}{black!85} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Define keys for \cs{DTLbarchart} optional argument. -% Set the maximum value of the $y$ axis. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{max}{\def\DTLbarmax{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the total length of the bar chart -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{length}{\DTLbarchartlength=#1\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the maximum depth (negative extent) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{maxdepth}{% -\ifnum#1>0\relax - \PackageError{databar}{depth must be zero or negative}{}% -\else - \def\DTLnegextent{#1}% -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine which axes should be shown -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@choicekey{databar}{axes}[\var\nr]{both,x,y,none}{% -\ifcase\nr\relax - % both - \DTLbarxaxistrue - \DTLbaryaxistrue - \DTLbaryticstrue -\or - % x only - \DTLbarxaxistrue - \DTLbaryaxisfalse - \DTLbaryticsfalse -\or - % y only - \DTLbarxaxisfalse - \DTLbaryaxistrue - \DTLbaryticstrue -\or - % neither - \DTLbarxaxisfalse - \DTLbaryaxisfalse - \DTLbaryticsfalse -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Variable used to create the bar chart. (Must be a control -% sequence.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{variable}{% -\def\DTLbarvariable{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Variables used to create the multi bar chart. (Must be a -% comma separated list of control sequences.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{variables}{% -\def\dtlbar@variables{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Bar width -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{barwidth}{\setlength{\DTLbarwidth}{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Lower bar labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{barlabel}{% -\def\dtl@barlabel{#1}} -\def\dtl@barlabel{} -% \end{macrocode} -% Lower bar labels for multi-bar charts -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{multibarlabels}{% -\def\dtl@multibarlabels{#1}} -\def\dtl@multibarlabels{} -% \end{macrocode} -% Gap between groups in multi-bar charts (This should be in $x$ units -% where 1 $x$ unit is the width of a bar.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{groupgap}{\def\dtlbar@groupgap{#1}} -\def\dtlbar@groupgap{1} -% \end{macrocode} -% Upper bar labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{upperbarlabel}{% -\def\dtl@upperbarlabel{#1}} -\def\dtl@upperbarlabel{} -% \end{macrocode} -% Upper bar labels for multi-bar charts -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{uppermultibarlabels}{% -\def\dtl@uppermultibarlabels{#1}} -\def\dtl@uppermultibarlabels{} -% \end{macrocode} -% Define list of points for $y$ tics. (Must be a comma separated list -% of decimal numbers.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{yticpoints}{% -\def\dtlbar@yticlist{#1}\DTLbaryticstrue\DTLbaryaxistrue} -\let\dtlbar@yticlist=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the $y$ tick gap: -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{yticgap}{% -\def\dtlbar@yticgap{#1}\DTLbaryticstrue\DTLbaryaxistrue} -\let\dtlbar@yticgap=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define list of labels for $y$ tics. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{yticlabels}{% -\def\dtlbar@yticlabels{#1}\DTLbaryticstrue\DTLbaryaxistrue} -\let\dtlbar@yticlabels=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Define $y$ axis label. -% \begin{macrocode} -\define@key{databar}{ylabel}{% -\def\dtlbar@ylabel{#1}} -\let\dtlbar@ylabel=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLbarchart}\oarg{conditions}\marg{option list}\marg{db name}\marg{assign list} -%\end{definition} -% Make a bar chart from data given in data base \meta{db name}, -% where \meta{assign list} is a comma-separated list of -% \meta{cmd}\texttt{=}\meta{key} pairs. \meta{option list} must -% include \texttt{variable}\texttt{=}\meta{cmd}, where \meta{cmd} -% is included in \meta{assign list}. The optional argument -% \meta{conditions} is the same as that for \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLbarchart} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLbarchart}[4][\boolean{true}]{% -{\let\DTLbarvariable=\relax -\let\DTLbarmax=\relax -\let\DTLnegextent=\relax -\disable@keys{databar}{variables,multibarlabels,% -uppermultibarlabels,groupgap}% -\setkeys{databar}{#2}% -\ifx\DTLbarvariable\relax - \PackageError{databar}{\string\DTLbarchart\space missing variable}{}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the maximum bar height, unless \cs{DTLbarmax} has been -% set. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\DTLbarmax\relax - \DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{% - \expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter - {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@barvar}% - \ifx\DTLbarmax\relax - \let\DTLbarmax=\dtl@barvar - \else - \let\dtl@old=\DTLbarmax - \FPmax{\DTLbarmax}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@barvar}% - \fi - }% - \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax - \else - \let\dtl@thistick=\dtlbar@yticgap% - \whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\dtl@thistick}{0}{\DTLbarmax}}{% - \FPadd{\dtl@thistick}{\dtl@thistick}{\dtlbar@yticgap}% - }% - \let\DTLbarmax=\dtl@thistick - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the bar depth, unless \cs{DTLnegextent} has been -% set. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\DTLnegextent\relax - \def\DTLnegextent{0}% - \DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{% - \expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter - {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@barvar}% - \let\dtl@old=\DTLnegextent - \DTLmin{\DTLnegextent}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@barvar}% - }% - \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax - \else - \ifthenelse{\DTLisFPlt{\DTLnegextent}{0}}{% - \edef\dtl@thistick{0}% - \whiledo{\DTLisFPclosedbetween{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLnegextent}{0}}{% - \FPsub{\dtl@thistick}{\dtl@thistick}{\dtlbar@yticgap}% - }% - \let\DTLnegextent=\dtl@thistick - }{}% - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine scaling factor -% \begin{macrocode} - \@dtl@tmpcount=\DTLbarchartlength - \FPsub{\dtl@extent}{\DTLbarmax}{\DTLnegextent}% - \FPdiv{\dtl@unit}{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}{\dtl@extent}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Construct $y$ tick list if required -% \begin{macrocode} - \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{0pt}% - \ifDTLbarytics - \ifx\dtlbar@yticlist\relax - \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax - \dtl@constructticklist\DTLnegextent\DTLbarmax - \dtl@unit\dtlbar@yticlist - \else - \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz - \DTLnegextent\DTLbarmax\dtlbar@yticlist\dtlbar@yticgap - \fi - \fi - \ifx\dtlbar@ylabel\relax - \else - \ifx\dtlbar@yticlabels\relax - \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtlbar@yticlist\do{% - \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thislabel} - {\c@DTLbarroundvar}% - \ifDTLverticalbars - \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \else - \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}% - \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}% - \fi - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth - \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}% - \fi - }% - \else - \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtlbar@yticlabels\do{% - \ifDTLverticalbars - \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \else - \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}% - \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}% - \fi - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth - \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}% - \fi - }% - \fi - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Store the width of the bar chart in \cs{DTLbarchartwidth} -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\DTLbarchartwidth{\expandafter\number\csname dtlrows@#3\endcsname} -% \end{macrocode} -% Do the bar chart -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{tikzpicture} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set unit vectors -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLverticalbars - \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\dtl@unit sp}}% - \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\DTLbarwidth}{0pt}}% -\else - \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\dtl@unit sp}{0pt}}% - \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLbarwidth}}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Begin hook -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLbaratbegintikz -% \end{macrocode} -% Initialise -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@start{0}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Iterate through data -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Store the bar number in \cs{@dtl@bar} -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\let\expandafter\@dtl@bar - \csname c@DTLrow\romannumeral\dtlforeachlevel\endcsname% -% \end{macrocode} -% Convert variable to decimal -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter - {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@variable}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw bars -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{scope} - \DTLdocurrentbarcolor - \ifDTLverticalbars - \fill (\@dtl@start,0) -- (\@dtl@start,\dtl@variable) - -- (\@dtl@bar,\dtl@variable) -- (\@dtl@bar,0) -- cycle; - \else - \fill (0,\@dtl@start) -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@start) - -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@bar) -- (0,\@dtl@bar) -- cycle; - \fi -\end{scope} -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw outline -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{scope} -\ifdim\DTLbaroutlinewidth>0pt - \expandafter\color\expandafter{\DTLbaroutlinecolor} - \ifDTLverticalbars - \draw (\@dtl@start,0) -- (\@dtl@start,\dtl@variable) - -- (\@dtl@bar,\dtl@variable) -- (\@dtl@bar,0) -- cycle; - \else - \draw (0,\@dtl@start) -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@start) - -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@bar) -- (0,\@dtl@bar) -- cycle; - \fi -\fi -\end{scope} -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw lower $x$ labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLverticalbars - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@start.5}{0}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}}, - \DTLbarXlabelalign - }% -\else - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\@dtl@start.5}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}}, - \DTLbarXlabelalign - }% -\fi - \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{% - \DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel{\dtl@barlabel}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw upper $x$ labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLverticalbars - \expandafter\DTLifnumlt\expandafter{\DTLbarvariable}{0} - { - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@start.5}{\dtl@variable}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}} - }% - }{% - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@start.5}{\dtl@variable}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}} - }% - } -\else - \expandafter\DTLifnumlt\expandafter{\DTLbarvariable}{0} - { - \edef\dtl@textopt{right, - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@variable}{\@dtl@start.5}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}} - }% - }{% - \edef\dtl@textopt{left, - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@variable}{\@dtl@start.5}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}} - }% - } -\fi - \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{% - \DTLdisplayupperbarlabel{\dtl@upperbarlabel}} -% \end{macrocode} -% End of loop -% \begin{macrocode} - \edef\@dtl@start{\number\@dtl@bar}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw $x$ axis -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLbarxaxis - \ifDTLverticalbars - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarXAxisStyle] - (0,0) -- (\DTLbarchartwidth,0); - \else - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarXAxisStyle] - (0,0) -- (0,\DTLbarchartwidth); - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw $y$ axis -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLbaryaxis - \ifDTLverticalbars - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarYAxisStyle] - (0,\DTLnegextent) -- (0,\DTLbarmax); - \else - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarYAxisStyle] - (\DTLnegextent,0) -- (\DTLbarmax,0); - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot $y$ tick marks if required -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\dtlbar@yticlist\relax -\else - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtlbar@yticlist\do{% - \ifDTLverticalbars - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}} - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklength}{0pt}}} - \else - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}} - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLticklength}}} - \fi - \pgfusepath{stroke} - \ifx\dtlbar@yticlabels\relax - \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thistick} - {\c@DTLbarroundvar}% - \else - \dtl@chopfirst\dtlbar@yticlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest - \let\dtlbar@yticlabels=\dtl@rest - \fi - \ifDTLverticalbars - \edef\dtl@textopt{\DTLbarYticklabelalign,% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLticklabeloffset}{0pt}}, - }}% - \else - \edef\dtl@textopt{\DTLbarYticklabelalign, - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLticklabeloffset}} - }}% - \fi - \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}} - }% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot the $y$ label if required -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\dtlbar@ylabel\relax -\else - \addtolength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\baselineskip}% - \setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{0.5\DTLbarchartlength} - \ifDTLverticalbars - \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{0}{\DTLnegextent}}% - {\pgfpoint{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}}}, - rotate=90]{% - \dtlbar@ylabel} - \else - \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLnegextent}{0}}% - {\pgfpoint{\dtl@tmplength}{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}}}]{% - \dtlbar@ylabel} - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Finish bar chart -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLbaratendtikz -\end{tikzpicture} -\fi -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -% -%\begin{definition} -% \cs{DTLmultibarchart}\oarg{conditions}\marg{option list}\marg{db name}\marg{assign list} -%\end{definition} -% Make a multi-bar chart from data given in data base \meta{db name}, -% where \meta{assign list} is a comma-separated list of -% \meta{cmd}\texttt{=}\meta{key} pairs. \meta{option list} must -% include the \texttt{variables} key which must be a comma separated -% list of commands, where each command -% is included in \meta{assign list}. The optional argument -% \meta{conditions} is the same as that for \cs{DTLforeach}. -%\begin{macro}{\DTLmultibarchart} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\DTLmultibarchart}[4][\boolean{true}]{% -{\let\dtlbar@variables=\relax -\let\DTLbarmax=\relax -\let\DTLnegextent=\relax -\disable@keys{databar}{variable,upperbarlabel}% -\setkeys{databar}{#2}% -\ifx\dtlbar@variables\relax - \PackageError{databar}{\string\DTLmultibarchart\space missing variables setting}{}% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the maximum bar height, unless \cs{DTLbarmax} has been -% set. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\DTLbarmax\relax - \DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{% - \@for\DTLbarvariable:=\dtlbar@variables\do{% - \expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter - {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@barvar}% - \ifx\DTLbarmax\relax - \let\DTLbarmax=\dtl@barvar - \else - \let\dtl@old=\DTLbarmax - \FPmax{\DTLbarmax}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@barvar}% - \fi - }% - }% - \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax - \else - \let\dtl@thistick=\dtlbar@yticgap% - \whiledo{\DTLisFPopenbetween{\dtl@thistick}{0}{\DTLbarmax}}{% - \FPadd{\dtl@thistick}{\dtl@thistick}{\dtlbar@yticgap}% - }% - \let\DTLbarmax=\dtl@thistick - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the bar depth, unless \cs{DTLnegextent} has been -% set. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\DTLnegextent\relax - \def\DTLnegextent{0}% - \DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{% - \@for\DTLbarvariable:=\dtlbar@variables\do{% - \expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter - {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@barvar}% - \let\dtl@old=\DTLnegextent - \DTLmin{\DTLnegextent}{\dtl@old}{\dtl@barvar}% - }% - }% - \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax - \else - \ifthenelse{\DTLisFPlt{\DTLnegextent}{0}}{% - \edef\dtl@thistick{0}% - \whiledo{\DTLisFPclosedbetween{\dtl@thistick}{\DTLnegextent}{0}}{% - \FPsub{\dtl@thistick}{\dtl@thistick}{\dtlbar@yticgap}% - }% - \let\DTLnegextent=\dtl@thistick - }{}% - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Determine scaling factor -% \begin{macrocode} - \@dtl@tmpcount=\DTLbarchartlength - \FPsub{\dtl@extent}{\DTLbarmax}{\DTLnegextent}% - \FPdiv{\dtl@unit}{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}{\dtl@extent}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Construct $y$ tick list if required -% \begin{macrocode} - \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{0pt}% - \ifDTLbarytics - \ifx\dtlbar@yticlist\relax - \ifx\dtlbar@yticgap\relax - \dtl@constructticklist\DTLnegextent\DTLbarmax - \dtl@unit\dtlbar@yticlist - \else - \dtl@constructticklistwithgapz - \DTLnegextent\DTLbarmax\dtlbar@yticlist\dtlbar@yticgap - \fi - \fi - \ifx\dtlbar@ylabel\relax - \else - \ifx\dtlbar@yticlabels\relax - \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtlbar@yticlist\do{% - \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thislabel} - {\c@DTLbarroundvar}% - \ifDTLverticalbars - \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \else - \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}% - \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}% - \fi - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth - \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}% - \fi - }% - \else - \@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtlbar@yticlabels\do{% - \ifDTLverticalbars - \settowidth{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \else - \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}% - \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}% - \fi - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@yticlabelwidth - \setlength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}% - \fi - }% - \fi - \fi - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Calculate the offset for the lower label and number of labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\dtl@xticlabelheight=0pt\relax -\@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax -\@for\dtl@thislabel:=\dtl@multibarlabels\do{% - \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax - \settoheight{\dtl@tmplength}{\tikz\expandafter\pgftext\expandafter - [\DTLbarXlabelalign]{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel{\dtl@thislabel}};}% - \edef\@dtl@h{\the\dtl@tmplength}% - \settodepth{\dtl@tmplength}{\tikz\expandafter\pgftext\expandafter - [\DTLbarXlabelalign]{\DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel{\dtl@thislabel}};}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\@dtl@h}% - \addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\baselineskip}% - \ifdim\dtl@tmplength>\dtl@xticlabelheight - \setlength{\dtl@xticlabelheight}{\dtl@tmplength}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Calculate number of bars per group -% \begin{macrocode} -\@dtl@tmpcount=0\relax -\@for\dtl@this:=\dtlbar@variables\do{% - \advance\@dtl@tmpcount by 1\relax -}% -\edef\DTLbargroupwidth{\number\@dtl@tmpcount}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute the total width of the bar chart (in terms of -% the $x$ unit vector.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\edef\dtl@n{\expandafter\number\csname dtlrows@#3\endcsname} -\FPmul{\dtl@tmpi}{\dtl@n}{\DTLbargroupwidth} -\FPsub{\dtl@tmpii}{\dtl@n}{1}% -\FPmul{\dtl@tmpii}{\dtl@tmpii}{\dtlbar@groupgap}% -\FPadd{\DTLbarchartwidth}{\dtl@tmpi}{\dtl@tmpii} -% \end{macrocode} -% Do the bar chart -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{tikzpicture} -% \end{macrocode} -% Set unit vectors -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLverticalbars - \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\dtl@unit sp}}% - \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\DTLbarwidth}{0pt}}% -\else - \pgfsetxvec{\pgfpoint{\dtl@unit sp}{0pt}}% - \pgfsetyvec{\pgfpoint{0pt}{\DTLbarwidth}}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Begin hook -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLbaratbegintikz -% \end{macrocode} -% Initialise -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dtl@start{0}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Iterate through data -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLforeach[#1]{#3}{#4}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Store the bar number in \cs{@dtl@bar} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@dtl@barcount = 1\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% Set the multibar label lists -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\dtl@multibar@labels=\dtl@multibarlabels -\let\dtl@uppermultibar@labels=\dtl@uppermultibarlabels -% \end{macrocode} -% Compute mid point over group -% \begin{macrocode} -\FPmul{\dtl@multimidpt}{\DTLbargroupwidth}{0.5}% -\FPadd{\dtl@multimidpt}{\dtl@multimidpt}{\@dtl@start}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Iterate through each variable -% \begin{macrocode} -\@for\DTLbarvariable:=\dtlbar@variables\do{% -% \end{macrocode} -% Set end point -% \begin{macrocode} -\FPadd{\@dtl@endpt}{\@dtl@start}{1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Convert variable to decimal -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\DTLconverttodecimal\expandafter - {\DTLbarvariable}{\dtl@variable}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Get the current lower label: -% \begin{macrocode} -\dtl@chopfirst\dtl@multibar@labels\dtl@thisbarlabel\dtl@rest -\let\dtl@multibar@labels=\dtl@rest -% \end{macrocode} -% Get the current upper label: -% \begin{macrocode} -\dtl@chopfirst\dtl@uppermultibar@labels\dtl@thisupperbarlabel\dtl@rest -\let\dtl@uppermultibar@labels=\dtl@rest -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw bars -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{scope} - \expandafter\color\expandafter{\DTLgetbarcolor{\@dtl@barcount}}% - \ifDTLverticalbars - \fill (\@dtl@start,0) -- (\@dtl@start,\dtl@variable) - -- (\@dtl@endpt,\dtl@variable) -- (\@dtl@endpt,0) -- cycle; - \else - \fill (0,\@dtl@start) -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@start) - -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@endpt) -- (0,\@dtl@endpt) -- cycle; - \fi -\end{scope} -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw outline -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{scope} -\ifdim\DTLbaroutlinewidth>0pt - \expandafter\color\expandafter{\DTLbaroutlinecolor} - \ifDTLverticalbars - \draw (\@dtl@start,0) -- (\@dtl@start,\dtl@variable) - -- (\@dtl@endpt,\dtl@variable) -- (\@dtl@endpt,0) -- cycle; - \else - \draw (0,\@dtl@start) -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@start) - -- (\dtl@variable,\@dtl@endpt) -- (0,\@dtl@endpt) -- cycle; - \fi -\fi -\end{scope} -% \end{macrocode} -% Calculate mid point -% \begin{macrocode} -\FPadd{\@dtl@midpt}{\@dtl@start}{0.5}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw lower $x$ labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLverticalbars - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@midpt}{0}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}}, - \DTLbarXlabelalign - }% -\else - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\@dtl@midpt}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}}, - \DTLbarXlabelalign - }% -\fi - \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{% - \DTLdisplaylowermultibarlabel{\dtl@thisbarlabel}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw upper $x$ labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLverticalbars - \expandafter\DTLifnumlt\expandafter{\DTLbarvariable}{0} - { - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@midpt}{\dtl@variable}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}} - }% - }{% - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\@dtl@midpt}{\dtl@variable}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}}} - }% - } -\else - \expandafter\DTLifnumlt\expandafter{\DTLbarvariable}{0} - { - \edef\dtl@textopt{right, - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@variable}{\@dtl@midpt}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}} - }% - }{% - \edef\dtl@textopt{left, - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@variable}{\@dtl@midpt}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{\noexpand\DTLbarlabeloffset}{0pt}}} - }% - } -\fi - \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{% - \DTLdisplayuppermultibarlabel{\dtl@thisupperbarlabel}} -% \end{macrocode} -% End of loop increment loop variables -% \begin{macrocode} - \FPadd{\@dtl@start}{\@dtl@start}{1}% - \advance\@dtl@barcount by 1\relax -}% -% Draw lower group $x$ labels -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{\DTLbarlabeloffset}% -\addtolength{\dtl@tmplength}{\dtl@xticlabelheight}% -\ifDTLverticalbars - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@multimidpt}{0}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\dtl@tmplength}}}, - \DTLbarXlabelalign - }% -\else - \edef\dtl@textopt{% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@multimidpt}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\dtl@tmplength}{0pt}}}, - \DTLbarXlabelalign - }% -\fi - \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{% - \DTLdisplaylowerbarlabel{\dtl@barlabel}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Increment starting position by \cs{dtlbar@groupgap} -% \begin{macrocode} - \FPadd{\@dtl@start}{\@dtl@start}{\dtlbar@groupgap}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw $x$ axis -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLbarxaxis - \ifDTLverticalbars - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarXAxisStyle] - (0,0) -- (\DTLbarchartwidth,0); - \else - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarXAxisStyle] - (0,0) -- (0,\DTLbarchartwidth); - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Draw $y$ axis -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTLbaryaxis - \ifDTLverticalbars - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarYAxisStyle] - (0,\DTLnegextent) -- (0,\DTLbarmax); - \else - \expandafter\draw\expandafter[\DTLBarYAxisStyle] - (\DTLnegextent,0) -- (\DTLbarmax,0); - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot $y$ tick marks if required -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\dtlbar@yticlist\relax -\else - \@for\dtl@thistick:=\dtlbar@yticlist\do{% - \ifDTLverticalbars - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}} - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\pgfpoint{-\DTLticklength}{0pt}}} - \else - \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}} - \pgfpathlineto{ - \pgfpointadd{\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}} - {\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\DTLticklength}}} - \fi - \pgfusepath{stroke} - \ifx\dtlbar@yticlabels\relax - \FPround{\dtl@thislabel}{\dtl@thistick} - {\c@DTLbarroundvar}% - \else - \dtl@chopfirst\dtlbar@yticlabels\dtl@thislabel\dtl@rest - \let\dtlbar@yticlabels=\dtl@rest - \fi - \ifDTLverticalbars - \edef\dtl@textopt{\DTLbarYticklabelalign,% - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{0}{\dtl@thistick}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{-\noexpand\DTLticklabeloffset}{0pt}}, - }}% - \else - \edef\dtl@textopt{\DTLbarYticklabelalign, - at={\noexpand\pgfpointadd - {\noexpand\pgfpointxy{\dtl@thistick}{0}} - {\noexpand\pgfpoint{0pt}{-\noexpand\DTLticklabeloffset}} - }}% - \fi - \expandafter\pgftext\expandafter[\dtl@textopt]{% - \DTLbardisplayYticklabel{\dtl@thislabel}} - }% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Plot the $y$ label if required -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\dtlbar@ylabel\relax -\else - \addtolength{\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\baselineskip}% - \setlength{\dtl@tmplength}{0.5\DTLbarchartlength} - \ifDTLverticalbars - \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{0}{\DTLnegextent}}% - {\pgfpoint{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}{\dtl@tmplength}}}, - rotate=90]{% - \dtlbar@ylabel} - \else - \pgftext[bottom,center,at={\pgfpointadd - {\pgfpointxy{\DTLnegextent}{0}}% - {\pgfpoint{\dtl@tmplength}{-\dtl@yticlabelwidth}}}]{% - \dtlbar@ylabel} - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Finish bar chart -% \begin{macrocode} -\DTLbaratendtikz -\end{tikzpicture} -\fi -}} -% \end{macrocode} -%\end{macro} -%\iffalse -% \begin{macrocode} -%</databar.sty> -% \end{macrocode} -%\fi -%\Finale -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 8966a25bcbe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/datatool/source/datatool.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -% datatool.ins generated using makedtx version 0.93b 2007/7/23 22:53 -\input docstrip - -\preamble -Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved. -If you modify this file, you must change its name first. -You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone. You are NOT -ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of either this -file or a changed version, except for a nominal charge for copying -etc. -\endpreamble - -\askforoverwritefalse - -\generate{\file{datapie.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{datatool.dtx}{datapie.sty,package}} -\file{dataplot.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{datatool.dtx}{dataplot.sty,package}} -\file{datatool.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{datatool.dtx}{datatool.sty,package}} -\file{databar.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble -\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{datatool.dtx}{databar.sty,package}} -} - -\endbatchfile |